Home
        Tally Genicom 6600 Printer User Manual
         Contents
1.         n Designates the new LPI setting  Enter desired selection from the following  range  6  8  9  and 10           181       Chapter 9 PGL Commands    Change SFCC Command  Normal and Execute        This command allows you to change the current default Special Function  Control Character to one of your choosing  SFCC command characters may  be selected from ASCII characters in Hex address 00 FF  The SFCC  command is     elsa or    Table 21  Change SFCC Command                Field Function Option Modifier Selections   SFCC  Special Function Control Character   Enter the current Special Function Control   SFCC  Character followed by SFCC  then end the  entry with the parameter delimiter   n Designates the new SFCC Enter desired ASCII character in decimal  Command Character  format  The valid range of values is from  O   255     You may also use the optional method of  actually specifying the desired character  if  it is a printable character  by using the  format    n    to designate the character  If you  use this method enter the desired printable  character between single quote  characters              NOTE  In addition to being able to change the SFCC using this command we  have added the ability to change it through the printer control panel   The SFCC Parameter is located in the Configurations Menu     Example  To change the SFCC from the default character     tilde  to the    character use either the following commands        SFCC    64 OR   SFCC                 182 
2.       Create Corner Frames  Create     Create Corner Frames  Create        This command allows you to crate Corner Frames for your forms  Similar to  the BOX command  you define starting and ending points but in addition  you  specify the length of the horizontal and vertical arms of each corner frame   The basic command for creating Corner Frames is            ER    EG   Vis   HL         Table 22  Corner Command       Field    Function    Option Modifier Selections       CORNER    This is the command specifier   Using the following parameters  creates a set of corners around a  specified area of the form ata  specific line thickness and length of  vertical and horizontal arms of  each corner     Enter CORNER       LT        Dictates the line thickness        Line thickness is based on dot increments   1 72     horizontally and vertically  Line  thickness is only limited by your  specifications  Do not forget the parameter  delimiter        The SR  SC  ER  and EC parameters use the same methods for defining the CORNER Print area   Whether in columns or dots depends on the SCALE Command  You may also use the XX YY  format for plotting duplication print locations explained earlier in the Standards Section                 SR  Plots the starting ROW of the Enter a value ranging from 1 to one less  corner  than the maximum form length and the  parameter delimiter   SC  Plots the starting COLUMN of the Enter a value ranging from 1 to one less  corner  than the maximum form width an
3.      Earlier we created a logo named BOMB and a form called JobAppl  Now let   s  modify our earlier work and put them together with some Alphanumerical  commands  line commands  and a BOX command to create a Job Application  for a company called    Demolitions Are US        The logo we designed is fine the way it is  but to create a form that will fit on a  page of this manual we will have to modify the BOX and CREATE Form  command in the examples we used earlier     The overall form dimensions will be 5 6 inches wide by 8 5 inches long  It will  be printed at 10 CPI and 6 LPI  These figures give us a maximum line length  of 70 columns and form length of 51 lines  form length in dot rows would be  612      We have already created and stored the logo for the form  Now we will create  the form itself  First enter the CREATE Form Mode      CREATE   JobApp1   612    After we enter the CREATE Mode  create a border for our form by sending a  BOX Command specifying a box of 3 points thickness that prints three  columns from the left and right edge and three lines from the top and bottom  edge    BOX   3 3 3 48 52   STOP   We started our form creation and added a border  now we will compose the  items that will go inside the box     Remember that the BOMB logo we created earlier has a superimposed    D    on  it  The bomb is going to be part of the company title on the form  To finish the  form header  create an Alphanumeric string with the remaining characters of  the title to alig
4.      Vertical Version 1 repetition can be accomplished by bracketing the  commands and data to be repeated with the commands shown below     Command  Rnnnn   lt data gt    Z      Arguments  AR Version 1 Repeat Command  nnnn Number of times to repeat  0000 9999    lt data gt  Data to be repeated   AZA  Version 1 Vertical Repeat Terminator     Example  The command sequence    RO003    M0202Vertical Repeat      prints     Uertica e  Uert ica e  Uert ica e    NOTE  Version 1 Vertical Repeats may be nested only two levels deep  i  an outer repeat and an inner repeat      6 Buffered Defined Forms    Buffered Forms       Code V allows users to store commands and data in printer memory  The data  stored in memory may be named and called up for use any time  Data stored  in memory this way is called a buffered form  The buffered form can consist of  any data and commands sent to the printer     The Graphics Processing Language emulates both Version 1 and Version 2 of  the Code V Buffered Formatting Language  Version 2 buffered formatting  offers more features than Version 1 and should be used whenever possible  instead  See    Version 1 Buffered Formatting    on page 116     The printer uses a Heap Buffer space to store Buffered Forms and to process  Code V data  Each Buffered Form takes up a portion of the available Heap  Buffer space  The amount of work space memory available at any given time  may be determined by executing the Buffered Forms List Command  see  page 105     Data Fi
5.      X     x x      2B Xx   Xx       x   x    2C   X   Xx    xX x ax  y 2D     D     D     x     xX   2E x      x     x x      2F X kg     xX _ x a x  01  30   x x E x   x os  19 31 x   x   x Es x Se                                        1  It is recommended to avoid using ASCII Characters 0 and 1 when possible     They are reserved for future functions   2  Human Readable Index    3  Whether the printer performs    Double Pass    with two physical print passes  or special print modes  i e  emphasized   depends on the used printer type     Barcode Types   A   2 5 matrix  default   B   2 5 industrial   C   2 5 interleaved    D   Code 11  E   Code BCD matrix  F   Code 39  G   Codabar    H   EAN 8 with HRI       EAN 8 without HRI  J   2 5 matrix  default   K   EAN 13 with HRI    232    Barcode Header    L   EAN 13 without HRI  M   MSl modified Plessey  N   UPC A with HRI   O   UPC A without HRI   P   UPC E with HRI   Q   UPC E without HRI   R   Delta Distance  IBM   S   Code 128   T   EAN 128    All commercial barcodes  for labeling systems  of the H  I  K  L  N  O  P  Q  Types can be extended using the barcodes Add On 2 or Add On 5   see    Add On Barcodes    on page 257      HRI    HRI   Human Readable Index    HRI characters are centered if enough space is left  If the barcode printout is  smaller than the HRI character field  smaller character density  CPI  is used   Start and stop codes are not printed as HRI  a space character  SP  will be  stored     Barcode Width    By 
6.     III    6123456789          ov  00     D  uy  wv  Ki  tu  ei           220    MSI    MSI                  BARCODE    PDF    LOC     Map  Hn    BFoL  DARK    SR    sc            Sample CREATE MSI Program       CREATE   MSIA  BARCODE   MSTA  DARK  5 1   123456789     MSIA VSCAN H10 DARK 5 50  123456789    PDF   STOP   END    A    12345678978                                          Ll       ell    221    Chapter 10 PGL Barcode Commands And Output    POSTNET                BARCODE    POSTNET Samples  e ZIP  4 Program         CREATE   POSTNET  BARCODE  POSTNET 5 1   123456789   STOP   END    e Advaned Barcode Format       CREATE   POSTNET  BARCODE  POSTNET 5 1   12345678901   STOP   END    222    UPC A    UPC A            BARCODE  UPC A   LOC     Sample CREATE Code UPCA Program     CREATE   EAN13  BARCODE   UPC A DAR 5 1   12345654321         UPC a  VSCAN H10  DARK  5  50   12345654321    PDF   STOP   END       a  HO           RN  reer w          DA  ki    NTE    Di    cae    Mt 6 A 8     gt   A8  CH  D      rca    a   El  KH   ke     223    Chapter 10 PGL Barcode Commands And Output    UPC E                  BARCODE    UPCE   LOG    Sample CREATE Code UPC E Program     CREATE   UPCE  BARCODE   UPC E  DARK  5 1   012345678900   PDF   STOP   BARCODE   UPC E  VSCAN H10 DARK 5  50   012345678900   PDF   STOP   END    Output     8    123456  5             224    l l Barcode And LCP Printing    Introduction       This chapter describes all barcode and LCP sequences and control code
7.    AIBARC Turns ON the Barcode Mode                                   EAN8 Sets the barcode style to EAN 8    E Embeds the human readable character translation  in the barcode    1234567 Barcode data as well as human readable  characters    AG Command Terminator    Example 6  Barcodes may be printed in all four orientations  The following  four Graphics Passes will print     1  AM0505000   IFONT S 14GAIBARC C128 B  Horizontal4G  2  U05050004T0250   IBARC C128 B Upside G      3  4E0505000   TO0000   IBARC C128 B  Vert Left G   4  V05050004T0250   IBARC C128 B Vert Right G      orizontal    A A yp    Vert Left    Mm IUBITA Aan    68    First Command     Barcode Version 2    4M0505000   IFONT S 14G4IBARC C128 B Horizontal G    AMO505000 Causes barcode to print horizontally with a height  of 0 5 inches    AIFONT S 14G  Selects Draft 10 CPI characters    AIBARC C128   Turns ON Barcode Mode and selects Code 128  barcode    B  Prints the character translation below the barcode    Horizontal Data to be encoded as Code 128 barcode and  printed below the barcode as Draft 10 CPI  characters    AG Command Terminator    Second Command      U0505000    T0250   IBARC C128 B Upside G        4U0505000 Causes barcode to print upsdie down with a height  of 0 5 inches    ATO250 Tabs the start of the barcode 2 5 inches from the  left margin    AIBARC C128   Turns ON Barcode Mode and selects Code 128  barcode    B  Prints the character translation below the barcode    Upside Data to be encoded as 
8.    DST ON    NOTE  The reverse image characters are a few dots lower     Revese Image Descender Mode       If Descender Mode  AD  is turned on with Reverse Image on  the entire dark  background extends down to encompass the descenders     Example 1  Sending the Graphics Pass    M03030004Rfghij R   with  Descender Mode OFF prints     33    Chapter 2    Half Tone    Half Tone    Example 2  Sending the Graphics Pass    M03030004R   Dfghij4R   D     with  Descender Mode ON prints     NOTE  The dark background of Reverse Image extends three dot rows  below the descenders        34    Lines  boxes  and characters are printed in solid black  but they can also be  printed in patterns of dots  These patterns are called half tones  Many half  tone patterns are available  such as vertical  horizontal  and diagonal lines  as  well as many other designs     The selected pattern becomes the default pattern as long as the Graphics  Mode is enabled  Once Graphics Mode is disabled using the command  PN      the dot pattern defaults to the pattern corresponding to 04 hex     See Appendix D     Patterns    on page 273 for all available half tone patterns     The following command is used to turn on the Half Tone Mode as well as to  select a half tone pattern     Command    KLxx lt data gt     Arguments  AKL Turns ON the Hfl Tone Mode   XX Specifies the half tone pattern  where xx equals  any hex number between 00 and FF    lt data gt  Data to be printed using the selected pattern     Example  T
9.    gt 8 102 FNC1 FNC1 FNC1                      The following examples illustrate the Special Character usage    Barcode Commands    What a scanner will read       AIBARC C128 B  gt 81234G        F123  all Code B        AIBARC C128 B  gt 71234G      AIBARC C128 B  gt 61234G      AIBARC C128 B  gt 31234G        123  all Code A   123  all Code B   F123  all Code B       AIBARC C128 B  gt 21234G      AIBARC C128 B  gt 1234G   AIBARC C128 B  gt 456 gt 8123 G      F123  all Code B  123  all Code B   456F 123       AIBARC C128 B  gt 456 gt 71234G    AIBARC C128 B  gt 456 gt 61234G      456123  456 in Code B  123 in Code A   456F 123  all Code B        AIBARC C128 B  gt 456 gt 31234G      456F 123  all Code B           AIBARC C128 B  gt 456 gt 21234G         456F 123  all Code B              Code 128 Special Characters    Code 128 Special Characters       When a style selection has been made  character data will be translated from  the selected code style to the Code 128 representation as shown in Table 5     NOTE  Codes 96 through 102 do not have corresponding ASCII character    translations  these may be encoded using the special character table     Table 4  page 74      Table 5  Code 128 Translation Table                                                                            pode ee Code A Code B Code C  Value  0  space  space  00  1     01  2   02  3     03  4     04  5     05  6  amp   amp  06  7         07  8     08  9     09  10 KR i 10  11     11  12 e 12  13  hyphen   h
10.    n Stop code 20  Example    10 REM code 11 barcode   20 LPRINT CHR  27    211      30 LPRINT CHR  26    D3 111  CHR  25    40 LPRINT CHR    20    123   CHR  20    50 LPRINT CHR  27    210      238    Code BCD Matrix                                  Code BCD Matrix  Syntax  Figures  n  Start Code Stop Code  ASCII    o    to    g    te SC  hex  30 to 39 3A 3A  dec  48 to 57 58 58  Data Structure  ASCII DC4 Start code n   n Stop code DC4  hex  14 Start code n   n Stop code 14  dec  20 Start code n   n Stop code 20  Example    10 REM BCD matrix code barcode   20 LPRINT CHR  27    211      30 LPRINT CHR  26    E3 111  CHR  25    40 LPRINT CHR    20    123   CHR  20    50 LPRINT CHR  27    210      239    Chapter    11 Data Formats of Barcode Types                                  240    Code 39  Syntax  Figures Characters  n  Start Code Stop Code  Not fixed  Not fixed   recommended  recommended   ASCII  Q  to  9    A  to Ze and      OKI 115 31   Ze gie TS  If e WA  hex  30 to 39  41 to 5A and 2A 2A  24  25  2A  2B  2D  2E  2F  dec  48 to 57  65 to 90 and 42 42  36  37  42  43  45  46  47  Data Structure  ASCII DC4 Start code n   n Stop code DC4  hex  14 Start code n   n Stop code 14  dec  20 Start code n   n Stop code 20    Example  10 REM code 39 barcode    20 LPRINT CHR  27    211      3  F3 111    CHR  25       123   CHR  20    50 LPRINT CHR  27    210      30 LPRINT CHR  26   40 LPRINT CHR  20    27        CODABAR                                     CODABAR  Syntax  Figures 
11.   41  6  amp   amp  06 42 J J 42  7   07 43 K K 43  8     08 44 L L 44  9     09 45 M M 45  10     10 46 N N 46  11     11 47 O O 47  12 12 48 P P 48  13 hyphen   hyphen 13 49 Q Q 49  14 period   period 14 50 R R 50  15     15 51 S S 51  16 0 0 16 52 T T 52  17 1 1 17 53 U U 53  18 2 2 18 54 V V 54  19 3 3 19 55 W W 55  20 4 4 20 56 X X 56  21 5 5 21 57 Y Y 57  22 6 6 22 58 Z Z 58  23 7 7 23 59     59  24 8 8 24 60     60  25 9 9 25 61     61  26 g q 26 62 A N 62  27 j   27 63 a a 63  28  lt   lt  28 64 NUL     64  29     29 65 SOH a 65  30  gt   gt  30 66 STX b 66  31 2 2 31 67 ETX c 67  32     32 68 EOT d 68  33 A A 33 69 ENQ e 69  34 B B 34 70 ACK f 70  35 C C 35 71 BEL g 71                                  Figure 11  Code 128 Translation Table    254                                                                                                                Wert   Code A   Code B   Code C  72 BS h 72  73 HT i 73  74 LF j 74  75 VT k 75  76 FF   76  77 CR m 77  78 SO n 78  79 SI O 79  80 DLE p 80  81 DC1 q 81  82 DC2 r 82  83 DC3 s 83  84 DC4 t 84  85 NAK u 85  86 SYN v 86  87 ETB W 87  88 CAN D 88  89 EM y 89  90 SUB E 90  91 ESC   91  92 FS   92  93 GS H 93  94 RS   94  95 US DEL 95  96 FNC3   FNC3 96  97 FNC2   FNC2 97  98 SHIFT   SHIFT 98  99 CODEC   CODEC 99  100  CODEB  FUNC4   CODEB  101 FNC4   CODEA CODEA  102 FNC1   FNC1   FNC1          Codes 96 through 102 do not have    corresponding ASCII character    translations  these may be encoded  using the special char
12.   6  lt CRLF gt  TALL  AM2 6  lt CRLF gt   R0 12  lt CRLF gt  WIDER  M6 2  lt CRLF gt   R0  8  lt CRLF gt   TALLER lt CRLF gt  prints       A Hs    Double Density   D  Examples    AD2 15  lt CRLF gt  WIDE lt CRLF gt  prints        E E IEC a E     D15 2  lt CRLF gt  TALL  lt CRLF gt  prints        143    Chapter 7 Block Characters    AD15 15  lt CRLF gt  HUGE  lt CRLF gt  prints     HUGE    Mixing Barcode Block Characters       These following examples show the mixing of Barcode and block characters  with cursor movements     AB1 0 0 4  lt CR gt  123451D2 2  lt CR gt  1S125 0  lt CR gt  THIS IS CODE  39 lt CRLF gt  1S125 30  lt CR gt  WITH OCR B  lt CRLF gt  15125 20  lt CR gt  12345   lt CRLF gt  prints       THIS IS CODE 39  i WITH OCR B  ace 12345    AM6 6 lt CR gt  CODE 39 lt CR gt  4T480 0  lt CR gt  1B1 60 1 4  lt CR gt  12345  lt CRLF gt   prints     CODE 39 um    144    Mixing Barcode Block Characters    AD2 2  lt CR gt  C lt CRLF gt  o  lt CRLF gt  D lt CRLF gt  E  lt CRLF  lt CRLF gt  3  lt CRLF gt   9 lt CRLF gt  4T50 0  lt CR gt     C1 0 0 lt CR gt  123  lt CRLF gt  prints     Command Summary Table    Www moon          Command    Summary       ESC  lt 4h    ENTER Barcode Block Character Mode       ESC   lt 41  lower case L     EXIT Barcode Block Character Mode       AA home NL    AB type   height   size   option  NL    Move the Home    Select Horizontal Barcode       AC type   height   size  NL    Select Vertical Barcode                     AD  height   width  NL  
13.   AM Horizontal orientation of the Graphics Pass   02 Character height of 0 2 inches  0 51 cm    02 Character width of 0 2 inches  0 51 cm    000 No vertical justification   GRAPHICS Data printed at 0 2 inches high and 0 2 inches  wide   e Second Command      M02030530PTION      AM Horizontal orientation of the Graphics Pass   02 Character height of 0 2 inches  0 51 cm    03 Character width of 0 3 inches  0 76 cm    05 Justification down of 0 5 inches  1 27 cm    3 An additional three dot rows of justification down     OPTION Data printed at 0 2 inches high and 0 3 inches wide  with downward justification of 0 5 inches plus three  dot rows     30    Example 6  To place OPTION directly under GRAPHICS  a pass terminator        must be placed after the end of the first pass but before the  beginning of the second pass   AM0404000GRAPHICS     M04040530PTION     will now print     GR  PHICS  OPTION    Example 7  This example shows horizontal block characters with varying  degrees of justification     e     The Graphics Pass     M0303060P   M0303040a   M0303020s   M0303000s    prints     e First Command      M0303060    AM Horizontal orientation of characters   03 Character height of 0 3 inches  0 76 cm    03 Character width of 0 3 inches  0 76 cm    06 Justified down 0 6 inches  1 5 cm    0 No additional dot rows of justification   P Data to be printed      Second Command      M0303040a  AM Horizontal orientation of characters   03 Character height of 0 3 inches  0 76 cm    03 Cha
14.   Character Meaning     SUB  F    EM  NOTE      hex 1A  dec 26     ASCII a  A     ASCII n   0      ASCII   ASCII x  0     ASCII y  0     ASCII z  0        hex 19  dec 25     Zen     90      g     ng    ng    Start header    Print feature  see section  Barcode Print  Feature F  to select the F codes  page 10     Barcode Types  see section  Barcode  Types      Barcode height in n 6 inch   At n  0  the barcode height equals to 1 12  inch     Separation character    Width of the narrow bar   see    Barcode Width    on page 233     Width of the narrow space   see    Barcode Width    on page 233     Ratio of wide to narrow   see    Barcode Width    on page 233     End of header    For encoding ASCII values to decimal or hexadecimal values refer to     Character Sets    on page 305     Barcode Header    The default parameter values are the following    e Unsecured mode  see section  Secured Unsecured mode    e HRI OFF  Normal Print  Double Pass  F   SP    e Barcode Type 2 5 matrix  a    A     e Barcode height 1 6 inch  n    1     e Narrow bar  x    0     e Narrow space  y    0     e Ratio of wide to narrow 2 to 1  z    0      When only parts of the header are to be changed  copy the header up to the  parameter which must be changed  and then close the header with the end   of header character  If a header error was detected the total previous features  are still active     The  Barcode brackets   hex 14  dec 20   initiate and terminate the printing of  the barcodes     If the printe
15.   First plot the logo on a grid so you know which dots are necessary for printing   Then compose the dot pattern information for each row of the graphic  Use  the following graphic as the logo for the company  The syntax on below  creates the BOMB logo plotted       LOGO BOMB 54 30  1 20  2 20  3 20  4 19  5 19  6 18  7 18  8 17  9 17  10 16  11 16  1215  1315  14 15  1511 19  16 11 19  17 11 19  18 11 19  19 11 19  2011 19  21 11 19  22 9 21  23 8 23  24 6 24  25 6 25  26 5 25  27 5 26  28 4 27  29 4 27  30 3 28  31 3 11 23 28  32 2 11 24 29    189       25 29  25 29   29   30   29   29    26  26  26 30  26 30  26 30  26 29  25  25    18 20  18 21  8 22  8 22  8 22  8 22  8 22  8 22  8 21  18 20  24 29  23 28    15 20 25    10    5    oe oo rors    9044644644444 6   rro      a   E ie bed  SOOO ees o Ak              A  Por     49  da    rrooor o         9  os   WK  etettrtt  i      Hrrrroorrrrorrrrsrorrrrrrorr r   Ferro roorrrrrrroprrrrrrrroo         Figure 8  Logo Plot    PGL Commands    9    Chapter    SISI E E E UU e e Ok Ek DD st Ce GM   ee e e e e e ee ec e ON ON ON ON ON ONG LA   Pb lg wll wl wll SY Om OD   GE EE EE  Gi st IO gen CH e ON Gi et DON 0 e H e GN Gi et   SESEISEEESEGC SEA SE Ek Eckes    190    Delete Form Command  Normal     Delete Form Command  Normal        This command is used in NORMAL Mode to delete a stored form from    memory     DELETE FORM     Table 25  Delete Form Command                                           Field Function Option Modifier Sele
16.   G Buffered Form Delete X  AIFORM E lt form name gt  G lt data gt  G Buffered Form Execute X  AFORM L Buffered Form List X  AIFORM R Buffered Form Memory Reset Xx  AJHEX nn Hex Command X X  AILOGO nn4G Logos Xx Xx  Alnnn Interrupt Function X X  AIPEXP h v4G Pixel Expansion X X  AIREPE Repeat Terminator X  AIREPH n hhd4G Horizontal Repeat  Version 2 X  AIREPH n vvvd G Vertical Repeat  Version 2 X  NISO  n G ISO Character Set X X  AJvvd Vertical Justification X  AKF Half Dot Mode X  AKH Half Tone Toggle X  AKLnn Half Tone  AKnn Line Slew  ALBhhhdvyvdhv Boxes  ALDhhhdvvvd Dashed Lines  ALFhhhdvvwvdhvllldt     G Form Drawing  ALnn Form Length X  ALShhhdvvvd Solid Lines       ANX       288       Command Change             Table 46  Command Table                                        Command Description deer Geer  AO Free Format Off X  APN Graphics Mode Off Xx  APY Graphics Mode On x  AQ lt plot data gt  G Plot Mode  AR Reverse Image Toggle  ARA  Buffered Form Repeat  A ARnnnn   lt data gt    Z   Vertical Repeat  Version 1   Sn NLQ fonts X   Snntt   lt data gt    S   Horizontal Repeat  Version 1 A  AThhhd Horizontal Tab  AUhhwwjjd lt data gt  Graphics Pass  Upside Down  AVhhwwijd lt data gt  Graphics Pass  Vertical Down  AWnn Line Slew  AWnn Pass Width X  AX Ignore Data On  AYxX     Z Automatic Increment Decrement X  AZ Buffered Copy Repeat Terminator             289       Appendix F    G Modplot    The Modplot option is designed to give the user a choice in spacing between  Grap
17.   NOTE  If    d    is left out  density defaults are low     Example  The command  AM02020001ILOGO L 43   4G U0202000 ILOGO L 434G  AV02020001L0GO L43 G1E0202000 IL0GO L 431G     prints       RAND    Pixel Expansion       The Pixel Expansion command expands logos  fonts  and plot data up to 255  times their original size  The Pixel Expansion command remains in effect until  a new Pixel Expansion command is received  To turn Pixel Expansion on   send the following code     Command AIPEXP h v4G    Arguments  AIPEXP The Pixel Expansion command  h Represents the horizontal Pixel Expansion value   which ranges from 1 to 255   v Represents the vertical Pixel Expansion value   which ranges from 1 to 255    G Command Terminator  Example 1  The code    M0101000   ILOGO L45   G     prints the UL symbol in its  original size     Up    59    Chapter 3 Pixel Expansion    To enlarge the logo  send the Pixel Expansion code first  followed  by the logo command   For example  M01010004IPEXP 3 34G   ILOGO L45   G     prints     Example 2  Sending the code    MAIFONT S 34Gline of Text     prints at the  normal size     Line of Text    Whereas sending the code    MAIFONT S 3   G4IPEXP 4 3   GLine  of Text     prints     Line of Text    60    4    Barcodes    The CVCC provides the capability to print several standard barcode styles  with or without accompanying human readable characters  All barcode  encoding algorithms reside in the printer  The user needs to only send the  Barcode Command follo
18.   Postnet Barcodes  79  Output  PGL Barcode Commands  215  Output  PGL Barcodes  215    P    Page Number Command  PGL Commands  170  Paper Motion Commands  Home and Cursor  129  Parameter Delimiter  Special Function Control  Character  151   Parmeters in POSTNET  80   Pass Buffer Length  22   Pass Format  23   Pass Height  Positioning Data  85   Pass Spacing  Modplot   22   Pass Width  Positioning Data  86    Patterns  273  PDF417 in Code V  Postal Barcodes  312  PDF417 in PGL  Postal Barcodes  313  PGL Barcode Commands  Code 128B  216  Code 128C  217  Code 39  215  EAN 13  219  EAN 8  218  Interleaved 2 5  220  MSI  221  output  215  POSTNET  222  UPC A  223  UPC E  224  PGL Barcodes  205  command parameters  205  commands  215  CREATE mode  205  data field characters  211  incrementing barcode data  214  output  215  PGL Command Set  151  commands  155  practice  201  standards  151  PGL Command Set Standards  SFCC  151  special function control character  151  PGL Commands  155  alphanumeric string creation commands  158  box command  177  call LOGO command  180  change LPI command  181  change SFCC command  182  create corner frames  183  create form command  186  create Logo command  187  delete form command  191  delete Logo command  191  density command  192  directory command  192  duplication commands  167  169    Dynamic Incremented Alphanumeric  Strings  166  EXECUTE mode  172  Exit CREATE Mode  172  expanded print command  193  horizontal line commands  194  ignor
19.   Select Double Density Block Character Mode       AM  height   width  NL    Select Normal Density Block Character Mode       AN    NL    Select New Introducer       R  xrel   yrel  NL  S  xsign   ysign  NL    Relative Cursor Move    Signed Cursor Move       AT  xx   yy  NL    Absolute Cursor Move       U  x  N  AW  unit width    centers    dots  NL          Set Unit Line Height  Set White Black Barcode Ratio          145    Chapter 7 Command Summary Table    146    8 PGL Menu Operations    Introduction       The Printronix Graphics Language  PGL  option on your printer is designed to  be compatible with the Printronix Intelligent Graphics Processor  IGP    100  Version 2     On your printer some of the parameters you have to set for proper PGL  operations are located in Multi Level menus that can be accessed through the  printer control panel     PGL Menu Parameters       The PGL Graphic parameters can be accessed in the multi level  Configuration Menu  The menu has three different combinations of available  parameters depending on the model of the printer  All of the available  parameters are represented with applicable graphic option    See    PGL Graphic Parameters    on page 149     NOTE  Only those parameters that are applicable to the printer will appear in  the Configuration menu     147    Chapter    8    Graphic Menu Category    Graphic Menu Category       148    This category allows you to configure certain aspects of the Graphic Option    on your printer     Table
20.   T01000f text      10 CPI     prints   a tine OF TEXT    Default Font Selection       This command allows selection of a default font that when issued inside a  pass  selects the font used for the duration of that pass only  When used  outside a pass  it selects the font used in all non graphics printing     Command    IFONTS S nG lt data gt   Arguments  AIFONTS S  Indicates that a new font style will be selected     n The number of the selected default font  This  parameter can have up to five digits  although only  the following values are used     1   Draft at 10 CPI   2   Draft at 12 CPI   3   Draft at 15 CPI   4   Draft at 7 5 CPI   5   NLQ at 10 CPI   6   NLQ at 12 CPI   7   NLQ at 13 3 CPI   8   NLQ at 15 CPI   9   NLQ at 17 1 CPI   10   OCR A  10 CPI    11   OCR B  10 CPI    12   Symbol Set Low Density  13   Symbol Set High Density    AG Command Terminator   lt data gt  The data to be printed using the new font style     Example  The human readable characters can be printed in the OCR A font  style by sending the command  AM02020004IFONTS S 10    G12345    which prints     12345    AM0202000  Sets up Horizontal orientation and the window size  for the non translated data characters at 0 2 inches   0 51 cm  square with no justification     AIFONT S  Indicates that a new font style will be selected     10 Selects OCR A at 10 CPI   AG Command Terminator   12345 Data to be printed using OCR A at 10 CPI     43    Chapter 2    Draft Fonts    Draft Fonts       The draft fon
21.   The format for this command is      PAGE   SR  SC    Table 14  Page Number Command    Field Function Option Modifier Selections             PAGE  Command Specifier Enter PAGE       SR and SC parameters define the starting location of the page number  Whether in columns or  dots depends on the SCALE Command  You may also use the XX YY format for plotting  duplication print locations explained earlier in the Standards Section              SR  Plots the starting row of the page Enter a value ranging from 1 to one less  number  than the maximum form length    SC Plots the starting column of the Enter a value ranging from 1 to one less  page number  than the maximum form width           The printer automatically increments the page numbers starting from the page  number specified in the EXECUTE command  If a page number is not  specified in EXECUTE command  no page number will print     170    Field    Reverse Print Command  Create     Reverse Print Command  Create        This command allows you to define an area on a form where reverse printing   white ouput on black background  will be output        Reverse printing cannot be used with OCR Characters or Overlay Data     Table 15  Reverse Command    Function    Option Modifier Selections       REVERSE    This is the command specifier   Using the following parameters a  field of reverse printing will be  defined for a location on a form     Enter REVERSE       D   Dark Printing       Optional parameter for changing  horizontal d
22.   manual  lasts only until the end of that pass     e When AIISO is sent outside a pass   The selected ISO character set is used both inside and outside passes  until Code V is exited  Also  upon re entering Code V  the ISO character  set selection made during the previous Code V session is retained     To form an ISO character set     IIISO only changes 12 characters from the  lower US set  These 12 character differences are shown for each ISO  character set on page 47     15 CPI    The upper Code V character set contains the following characters not found in  the Latin1 set     Hex Value Printed Character    80  81   82  83  98  99  9A  9B    1  Ue Y  lt  lt  Oe    Compressed Fonts       Code V has the following nine compressed fonts for use in normal printing  outside of a Graphics Pass     e Near Letter Quality  NLQ  character sets at 10  12  13 3  15  and 17 1  CPI     e OCR A and OCR B 0 10 inch character sets at 10 CPI     Emulation control codes are supported with Compressed Fonts Mode  escape  sequences are not  To print characters within a Graphics Pass  see    Graphics  Pass    on page 21     Command   n     Arguments  AH Turns ON the Compressed Font Mode  n Font selection     1 for NLQ  10 CPI   2 for NLQ  12 CPI   3 for NLQ  13 3 CPI   4 for NLQ  15 CPI   5 for NLQ  17 1 CPI   6 for OCR A  10 CPI   7 for OCR B  10 CPI   8 for Draft  12 CPI   9 for Draft  15 CPI     To turn off the Compressed Fonts Mode  send the command   0      41    Chapter 2    NLQ Fonts    NL
23.   when the  Vscale option is turned off  we will now emulate this     Block Character       Block characters are printed by putting the characters to be printed into the   lt data gt  portion of a Graphics Pass  Thus  the Block Character Command is  the same as the Graphics Pass Command     Each block character is printed within a window which includes an appropriate  amount of space for character separation  The block character window size  ranges from 0 1 inches  0 25 cm  to 9 9 inches  25 15cm  in increments of 0 1  inch  0 25 cm   the character window includes 1 dot row or column of  intercharacter space for every 0 1 inches in window size  That is  if the  Graphics Pass command is    M0505000  then the character window size will  be 0 5 x 0 5 inches  including a 5 dot column space to the right of the  character  see Figure 1 on page 27        WINDOW WIDTH l    H  A       DOT ROW ENCODING  DIRECTION  CHARACTER SPACE  CHARACTER HEIGHT  WINDOW HEIGHT         CHARACTER WIDTH    Figure 1  Character Window    27    Chapter 2 Block Character    When a block character is rotated 90 degrees clockwise or counterclockwise  on a page  the height and width values are exchanged     e the Graphics Pass height value determines the new character width   e the Graphics Pass width value determines the new character height   Command  M  U  V  or EJhhwwjjd lt data gt       Arguments AM  U  V  or E  One of the four orientation commands  M   U   AV  or  E     hh The height of each printed char
24.  0  Are you afraid of loud noises    17 10 0 0  If answer is yes  go no farther and depo    18 10 0 0  sit your application in the receptacle by    19 10 0 0  the front door as you leave the premises    21 10 0 0  1a     21 14 0 0  Can you hear at ali      23 10 0 0  1b     23 14 0 0  If yes  continue on     24 14 0 0  If no  continue on     26 6 0  2     26 10 0 0 Name  no Xs please     28 6 0 0  3     28 10 0 0  Address     33 6 0 0  4     33 10 0 0  Do you have all of your fingers    35 6 0 0  5     35 10 0 0  Have you ever been convicted of any   36 10 0 0  crime s  involving explosives    E D 45 10 0 0  emolitions can be YOU TOO     STOP   HORZ   1 16 10 41 46   1 21 10 34 42   1 26 10 30 50   1 29 10 15 50   1 30 10 15 50   1 31 10 15 50   1 33 10 42 50   1 36 10 42 50   STOP    EXECUTE JobAppl     NORMAL    202    Select Format  SF  Command  Normal  Create  and Execute     Job Application  Explosives Handler    litions fre US    Answer ALL Questions  If you do not under   stand a question or have no answer for a  question  stop where you are and deposit your  application in the receptacie by the front  door as you leave the premises     1  Are you afraid of loud noises   If answer is yes  go no farther and depo   sit your application in the receptacle by  the front door as you leave the premises   la  Can you hear at allt     1b  If yes  continue on   If no  continue on     Name  no Xs please     Address     Do you have all of your fingers     Have you ever been convic
25.  1     296    I PY PN Data Processing    PN Then Data Processing When PN Then   NONE             Character 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Jun   Number  Data Stream     P N Xx O Xx O Xx O                                                Printer Begins ls the Is the  Processing at NO 4th Character NO 4th Character YES  The 4th Character CR  LF  FE EYES  YES  NO    Printer Begins  le the 4th is the NO  Character CR Sth Character  DPE The 4th Character  YES  Printer Begins is the Is the NO Printer Begins  Processing at Sth Character 6th Charact Processing at  CR  LF  FF CR  LF     er  The 5th Character LF  FE The 6th Character  YES YES  Printer Begins ls the NO Printer Begins  Processing at 6th Character Processing at  The 6th Charactor CR The 7th Character  YES  ls the  7th Character  CR  LF  FE  YES  Printer Begins  at  The 8th Character    297    Appendix   PN Then Data Processing When PN Then   ALL    PN Then Data Processing When PN Then   ALL          Character 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Ju   Number  Data Stream     P N Xx O Xx O Xx O ol                                                    ls the  4th Characte NO       ig  CW  Begins  ml Processing at  The 4th Character    Printer Begins  Processing at  The 6th Character    298    PY Then Data Processing When PY Then   NONE            ls the Character  YES   ls the Character  YES    Read Next Character    Appendix   PY Then Data Processing When PY Then   TERM       PY Then Data Processing When PY Then   TERM             300    J    Block Character Si
26.  121   Commands  287    Commands  PGL Barcodes  215  Comments  Special Function Control  Character  153  Compressed Fonts  character printing  41  Control Code Command Changes  116  Control Code Command Changes  Buffered  Forms  101  Control Code Equivalents  Free Format  20  Control Panel Option  46   Block Character  46  Control Panel Option  character printing  27  Control Panel Selection  293   graphic category  293   graphics category  293   printer control panel graphics category  293  Control Sequences  122   print cycles  122  Control Sequences Formatting  Industrial Graphics  Application  123  Control Sequences  Industrial Graphics  Application  121  Corner Command  using  185  Corner Frames  PGL Commands  183  Create   Boxes  53   Form Drawing  55   Lines  49   Logos  58  Create Form Command  PGL Commands  186  Create Graphics  49  Create LOGO Command  PGL Commands  187  CREATE Mode  PGL Barcodes  205  Customer Support Center  267  CVCC  18   change  18    D    Dark Bar Ratios  70   DARK parameter  Special Function Control  Character  154   DarkBar Parameter  Graphic Category  294  Darkbar Parameter  PGL Graphic Parameters  149  Dashed Lines  line drawing  51    321    Data Field Characters  PGL Barcodes  211  Data Fields  Buffered Forms  99  Data Formats of Barcode Types  235   CODABAR  241   Code 11  238   Code 128  252   Code 2 5 Industrial  236   Code 2 5 Interleaved  237   code 2 5 matrix  235   Code 39  Code 39  Data Formats of Barcode   Types  240   Code BCD 
27.  2  The command    LS05000114  prints a horizontal line 3 5 inches   8 9 cm  long and 0 1 inches  0 25 cm  plus 1 dot row thick     ALS Solid Line Print command   035 A horizontal dimension of 3 5 inches  8 9 cm     0 No dot column additions to the horizontal  dimensions    001 A vertical dimension of 0 1 inches  0 25 cm     1 Additional vertical dimensions of 1 dot row     Example 3  The command 1LS00020110     prints a vertical line 2 dot columns  wide and 1 1 inches  2 79 cm  high     ALS Solid Line Print command  0002 A horizontal dimension of 2 dot columns   0110 A vertical dimension of 1 1 inches  2 79 cm      50    Dashed Lines    Dashed Lines       Description    Command  Arguments  ALD  hhh    Example 1     Dashed lines are drawn by printing alternate tenths of an inch   every 0 25 cm   The individual dashed marks will be oriented to  the line   s strongest dimension  horizontal or vertical   If the  horizontal and vertical lengths are equal  the dashes will be  horizontal  Dashed lines can be printed using the command     ALDhhhdvvvd    Dashed Line command    The horizontal dimension  specified in increments of 0 1 inches   0 25 cm   ranging from 000 to 132  0 to 13 2 inches or 0 to  33 6 cm      Additional dot columns  from O to 9     vvv   The vertical dimension  specified in increments of 0 1 inches   0 25 cm   ranging from 000 to 132  0 to 13 2 inches or 0 to 33 6  cm     d   Additional dot rows  from 0 to 9     The command    LD02000010     prints a horizontal 
28.  64 e 6  7 italy S       o         tu aoe i  8 Spain R  in       fA       47    Chapter 2 ISO Character Set Table    48    3 Creating Lines And  Graphics    Line Drawing       Code V allows printing of solid or dashed lines of various thicknesses and  orientations  The following sections describe the line drawing commands and    their usage     Solid Lines       Description Solid lines can be printed horizontally and vertically ranging in    Command  Arguments  ALS  hhh    VVV    d    width and length from one dot to 13 2 inches  The solid line  command is     ALShhhdvvvd    Solid Line command    The horizontal dimensions  specified in increments of 0 1 inches   0 25 cm   ranging from 000 to 132  0 to 13 2 inches or 0 to  33 6 cm     Additional dot columns  ranging from 0 to 9 dot columns     The vertical dimensions  specified in increments of 0 1 inches   0 25 cm   ranging from 000 to 132  0 to 13 2 inches or 0 to 33 6  cm      Additional dot columns  ranging from 0 to 9 dot columns     NOTE  The length and thickness of a line must be at least one dot     49    Chapter 3 Line Drawing    Example 1  The command    LS04000001     prints a horizontal line exactly  4 inches  10 2 cm  long and 1 dot row thick        ALS Solid line print command    040 A horizontal dimension of 4 0 inches  10 2 cm     0 No dot column additions to the horizontal  dimensions    000 No vertical dimensions in increments of 0 1 inch   0 25 cm     1 Additional vertical dimensions of 1 dot row     Example
29.  7  Configurations Menu Entries For Graphics Options       Menu Entries                                  Applicable  Menu Level 1 Menu Level 2 Menu Level 3 Graphic Option  Category Parameter Selections  Graphic CVCC Cmd 1 255 Code V only  Smooth 1 99 Code V and PGL  PY Then None Code V only  All  Term  PN Then All Code V only  None  Dark Bar OFF Code V and PGL  ON  Version 2 Code V only  1  Descndr Fixed Code V only  Auto  Vscale OFF Code V and PGL  ON  Zero Open Code V and PGL  Slashed  SFCC 1 255 PGL only                   Smooth Parameter    PGL Graphic Parameters       This section explains the Graphic Category parameters that applies to the  PGL Graphic Option on your printer     Smooth Parameter       The Smooth Parameter affects the block characters in PGL  Smoothing  causes the stair step appearance of larger block characters to be less  pronounced  This parameter dictates the character size at which smoothing  takes place  The default setting for Smooth is 3     Example     Smooth ON for size 6 Characters    ABCDEF    Smooth OFF for size 6 Characters    ABCDEF    Darkbar Parameter       For barcodes to print at a heavier than normal dot density  use this parameter  and set up the printer to output all barcodes at 120 DPI instead of 60 DPI   See    Half Dot Mode  Double Density     on page 36 for a sample of dark  printing  The default for this parameter is OFF     149    Chapter 8 PGL Graphic Parameters    Vscale Parameter       Due to the difference between horizont
30.  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvuxyz  0123456789    285    Appendix E   FH OCR A  amp  B    286    F    Commands    Table 46  Command Table                                           Command Description deren Deg   A n Compressed Fonts x  A Cnn Draft Fonts X Xx  AO Hn Dump Mode X  A Lnn Lines Per Inch  LPI  A  A nnn Data Field  Buffered Forms X   A Ignore Data Off A  AB   lt data gt   Buffered Formatting  Version 1 X   B B N O S T Y 9x lt ratio gt  lt data gt  G Barcode Style 1  Horz Var  Ratio   B B N O S T Y x lt data gt  G Barcode Style 1  Horizontal X  ACnn lt data gt    Z Buffered Form Copy A  AC B N O S T  Y 9x lt ratio gt  lt data gt    G Barcode Style 1  Vert Var  Ratio X  AC B N O S T  Y x lt data gt    G Barcode Style 1  Vertical Xx   AD Descender Mode X    Dhhhvvv Pass Density X A  ADnn Dot Slew A  AEhhwwijd lt data gt  Graphics Pass  Vertical Left X x  AF Free Format A  A FF Full Space Font Mode X X  A FH Half Space Font Mode X X  A FQ Quality Font Mode X X   G Command Terminator X X   Hnn Form Length A                287       Appendix F    Table 46  Command Table                                                    AMhhwwjjd lt data gt     Graphics Pass  Horizontal    Command Description deen SEN  AHnn Pass Height X  AIBARC x R lt ratio gt   N E B   lt data gt    G   Barcode Style 2  Var  Ratio X  AIBARC x  N E B   lt data gt    G Barcode Style 2 X  AIFONT S n4G lt data gt  Default Font X  AIFORM C    Buffered Form Create X  AIFORM D lt name gt  
31.  Block characters    Outside A Pass    Global Graphics Pass commands  i e  commands which act on the entire  pass as a unit  such as those which cause the entire Pass to be repeated or  stored in memory for later use      Environmental commands wuch as form length setting  Graphics Mode  and  Free Format     Non GPL Data    Any data you want to go to the current Control Panel emulation must be sent  outside of a Graphics Pass  Appdendix F     Command Table    on page 287  lists all GPL commands     Pass Spacing  Modplot        Code V output can be affected by a Plot Mode option that is available on your  printer  Appendix G     Modplot    on page 291 explains the Modplot option and  how it affects Code V output     Pass Buffer Length       Data received from the host is stored in a Pass Buffer  The Printer begins to  process a Graphics Pass when it receives a Pass Terminator  The printer  processes one pass at a time  printing at the end of each pass  If the Pass  Buffer fills up before the printer encounters a Pass Terminator  it terminates  the pass and attempts to process and print it     Buffered Form definitions and Repeat sequences cannot be processed until  the Form or Repeat Terminator is received  therefore  the entire Form  Definition or Repeat Sequence must fit into the Pass Buffer to be printed  correctly  Buffered Form execute data can be larger than the Pass Buffer  The  Printer processes this data one Pass Buffer at a time  until the Form Execute  Terminator is
32.  Code 128 barcode style selection can also be done manually by adding a  style selection character to the beginning of the barcode data     Code 128 characters are uniquely identified by a Code 128 value that range  from O to 105  For each value there is a single pattern of bars and spaces that  form a Code 128 character  there are 107 Code 128 characters  the STOP  character doesn t have a value   Code 128 barcode data is mapped by Code  V into Code 128 values  Code V then uses the algorithm specified in the AIM  USS 128 Specifications to determine the combination of codes that will  produce the shortest possible barcode     Some users may wish to control the Code 128 style used  To allow this  Code  V has special commands that can be included in the command that allow the  user to specify the Code 128 style that will be used  These special codes also  allow the user to encode special characters or call special functions as  defined in the Code 128 Specifications  Which special functions or characters  will be called out is dictated by teh style of Code 128 barcode  A  B  or C   being used     73    Chapter    74    4    Table 4  Code 128 Special Command Characters                         Special Code 128 Code A Code B Code C  Character   Hex Value Character Character Character   gt 0 30  gt   gt  30   gt 1 95 US DEL 95   gt 2 96 FNC3 FNC3 96   gt 3 97 FNC2 FNC2 97   gt 4 98 Shift Shift 98   gt 5 99 Code C Code C 99   gt 6 100 Code B FNC4 Code B   gt 7 101 FNC4 Code A Code A
33.  Command is processed   Term  Only the Terminator  FF  LF  or CR  is processed   None  None of the data is processed     If the None option is selected  any one of the following control codes  or  combination of control codes  immediately following a    PN or  APY   on the same line will not be printed     e Carriage Return   e Line Feed   e New Line   e Form Feed   e Carriage Return followed by a Line Feed    e Carriage Return followed by New Line  or Carriage Return followed by  Form Feed    lf PY Then is set to All or Term  all characters that follow a PN or APN4  on the  same line will print     Turning Graphics Mode Off       The Graphics Mode Off Command is the sequence    PN followed by a Pass  Terminator  As with the Graphics Mode On Command   PY   the Graphics  Mode Off Command must be sent in the first column of a line  i e  after a  Carriage Return   This command will cause the printer to     e Exit the Graphics Mode  e Display the ONLINE message    e Treat all further GPL commands as printable characters to be sent to the  current emulation     A few fundamental GPL commands and concepts are described in the  following sections  Knowledge of these commands and concepts is essential  for understanding the descriptions and examples in the remainder of this  manual     Chapter 1 Code V Command Character  CVCC     Code V Command Character  CVCC        All GPL commands begin with a Command Character  By default  this  character is an ASCII caret     having hexadecimal 
34.  Commande  172   Exit CREATE Mode  PGL Commands  172  Exiting Barcode Block Character Mode  Industrial  Graphics Application  123   Expanded Print Command  PGL Commande  193    F    Font Quality Speed  44   Full Space Font Mode  44   Half Space Font Mode  45   High Quality Font Mode  44  Fonts  277   A FF Draft  280   A FF NLQ  281   A FF OCR A  282   A FF OCR B  282   A FH Draft  283   A FH NLQ  284   A FH OCR A  285   A FH OCR B  285   A FQ Draft  277   A FQ NLQ  278   A FQ OCR A  279   A FQ OCR B  279    Form Drawing  55  Form Length  Positioning Data  87  Form Names  Special Function Control  Character  152  Forms  Buffered  99  Forms  Predefined  109  Free Format  19  control code equivalents  20  turn off  19  turn on  19  Full Space Font Mode  44    G    German  Data Formats of Barcode Types  264  German  LCP Character Set  264  German  LCP Character Sets  306  GPL Commands  25  multiple passes  25  Graphic Category  Code V Command Character parameter  293  DarkBar parameter  294  Descender parameter  295  PGL Special Function Command Character  parameter  295  PN Then Parameter  294  PY Then Parameter  294  Version parameter  294  Vscale parameter  295  Zero parameter  295  Graphic Category  Control Panel Selection  293  Graphic Menu Category  PGL Menu  Operations  148  Graphics  49  pixel expansion  59  Graphics Directory  Printer Control Panel  293  Graphics Mode  16  PY Then  17  turn off  17  turn on  16  Graphics Pass  21  Graphics Processing Language  16  Graphi
35.  DOT   CORNER  3 1 1 288 240 30 30  3 22 19 267 222 30 30  3 43 37 246 204 30 30  3 64 55 225 186 30 30  3 85 73 206 168 30 30  STOP   END    EXECUTE   CORNER   NORMAL    T  2  Re  pa   ds at   LL d   LL J     185    Chapter 9 PGL Commands    Create Form Command  Normal        This command is used to enter CREATE Form Mode  The command structure  for entering CREATE Mode is        Table 23  Enter CREATE Mode Command             Field Function Option Modifier Selections    CREATE Indicates CREATE Mode  Enter the current Special Function Control  Character followed by CREATE   Name Enter the name of the form in this Form names are allowed a maximum of  field  eight characters  The follownig ASCII    characters may be used in form names     e Upper and lower case A   Z   HEX 41   5A and 61   7A       Number 0   9  HEX 30   39   e Dollar sign    HEX 24    e Percent Sign    HEX 25    e Dash    HEX 2D    e At son O  HEX 40    e Braces      HEX 7B and 7D   e Parens      HEX 28 and 29   e Tilde    HEX 7E    e Single quotes          Hex 60 and 27   e Exclamation point    HEX 21   e Pound sign    HEX 23    e Amersand  amp   HEX 26             FL This parameter sets the Form Enter O to set the Form Length to end  Form Length   Length in three ways  automatically after the longest element   Enter a value from 1   65 535 dot rows to  set the Form Length to a specified amount   e Specific form length in dot To compute the desired number of dot   rows  rows multiply length in inches by 72  
36.  Example 2     Example 3     AM   02   02   00   0  Graphics    A    GraPhics    Horizontal orientation of character   Character height of 0 2 inches  0 51 cm    Character width of 0 2 inches  0 51 cm    Justified downward 0 00 inches    No additional dot rows of justification down   Data to be printed    Pass Terminator     The Graphics Pass    M0302000Graphics     prints     AM   03   02   00   0  Graphics    GraPhics    Indicates this Graphic Pass is oriented horizontally   Character height of 0 3 inches  0 76 cm    Character width of 0 2 inches  0 51 cm     No justification down    No additional dot rows of justification down     Data to be printed 0 3 inches high and 0 2 inches  wide     The Graphics Pass  U0303000Graphics     prints     SI TYdeuy    AU    03  03  00  Graphics    Rotated 180 degrees from the horizontal  orientation     Character height of 0 3 inches  0 76 cm    Character width of 0 3 inches  0 76 cm    No justification down     Block characters to be printed in the upside down  orientation     29    Chapter 2 Block Character    Example 4  The Graphics Pass    E0101000Vertical Left _ prints             ed         AE Vertical left orientation of the pass   01 Character height of 0 1 inches  0 25 cm    01 Character width of 0 1 inches  0 25 cm    00 No justification down   0 No additional dot rows of justification down     Example 5  The Graphics Pass    M0202000GRAPHICS  AM02030530PTION   prints     GRAPHICS  OPTION    e First Command   AM0202000GRAPHICS  
37.  Example for      CHR   15    LCP   CHR  15    unsecured mode    CHRS  10   CHR   13      Example for L CI unsecured mode    Example 3    REM Example 3 for secured printing  OPEN  lpt1   FOR RANDOM AS  1    WIDTH  PRINT  RINT  RINT  RINT  RINT  RINT  RINT  ND          El FO tU Y PU Y Y                            41                                          5       H  H  H  bell   H  H  H    255   CHRS  27      11      CHRS  27    PSC1   CHR   27         CHRS  16    5   CHRS 25     Example for      CHRS  15    LCP   CHRS  15       secured   CHR  10    mode    STRINGS  5  10      Example for secured  mode I   KE     265    Chapter 11 Data Formats of Barcode Types    Example 4    Unsecured Mode  vertical spacing with various enlargement factors    DJ OO P Oh    O     w n  D  oO    Legend   A     a single line Feed  1 6     B     Factor 6 character  heigth 6x4   3x4 LF   C     Factor 7 character  height 7 x e additional space is added to gain a full Line Feed  D     Factor 4 character  height 4x4   2x4 LF   E     Factor 5 character  height 5 x b additional space is added to gain a full Line Feed  A     start  actual print  cursor  position       end  actual print position    Description    The room is occupied to fit the highest character in one line  Characters which  do not meet the 1 6  grid  have additional space added to fill the room to the  next possible line       Value may change due to actual line density setting     266    A Customer Support    TallyGenicom Customer Sup
38.  Free Format is turned on by sending the command  F  After the printer  receives the    F  subsequent control characters are ignored and the printer will  no longer recognize CR  LF  or FF as Pass terminators  However  the GPL  language will recognize the following control code equivalents as Pass  terminators     1      caret hyphen    equivalent to the Carriage Return Command  CR   2     caret asterisk    equivalent to the Line Feed Command  LF   3      caret comma    equivalent to the Form Feed Command  FF     Turning Free Format OFF       Free Format is turned off by sending the command  0O       19    Chapter    20    1    Free Format    Control Code Equivalents       When Free Format is turned ON  GPL control code equivalents are treated as  actual ASCII control codes  For example      functions in the same manner as  the ASCII control code SOH  If control code characters need to be passed to  the printer in Free Format Mode  use the control code equivalents shown in    Table 1     Table 1  Control Code Equivalents                                                       Conirol Code Equivalents Hex ASCII  Al  caret exclamation  01 SOH  AN  caret double quote  02 STX  A   caret pound sign  03 ETX  A   caret dollar sign  04 EOT  A   caret percentage sign  05 ENQ  A amp   caret ampersand  06 ACK     caret single quote  07 BEL  A   caret left parenthesis  08 BS  A   caret right parenthesis  09 HT  A   caret asterisk  OA LF  A   caret plus sign  0B VT  A   caret comma  OC FF  
39.  Pump  MOUE cion ii ais 45   Hex Command EE 45   Control Panel Option  stas ip las 46  Block Character    46   ISO Character Ges  46   ISO Character Set Table  47   3 Creating Lines And Graphics    sse 49   LING Drawing E 49  Solid RR 49  DashiedsLiness eege SES EE eee te est Edge Cen 51   Eet 53   Form Drawing utorrent 55   Plot Modest a taaan 57   LO ne ei eel nett Ad edt ees 58  Version LOGOS gengt ta 58  VISION 2 10 GOS irc alli 59    Pixel Expansion sairin ri e Eiaa 59    Table of Contents    4 Barcodes E 61  Selecting Barcodes    oocconccccincccccooccnooncnnnancnnnnncancnnn conan ncannnnnannnnnnns 62  Barcode Density viciosas 62  Barcode Height A 62  Barcode Wd    62  Barcode  Version EN EE 63  Barcode Version 3    64  Dark Light Bar Ratios            c  cccecceeeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeseceeeeeeeenaes 70  High Density Barcode AAA 71  LOGMARS Barcode   ccccccnoooccccconoocnnncononnnnnconnnnnnnnconnnnnnnconnnnnnnncnnnnss 72  Code 128 Barcode coooocconoccconoccccnonccconncnnnnncncnnncanonnn crac cnn aman nnnnnnns 72  Code 128 Special Characters    ooooococincccnnoncccnnoccccnnncnanaccnnnrnnnanananno 75   le tg teen E 79  Accessing POSTNET in OM Coooooccccnoccnonancnnonnnnnanncnnannnnnanananannnnnns 79  Onena om EE 79  Heebt  aii e E ENEE E E E A E A ER 79  E E 79  Parameters In POGTNET   80  AIAG Barcode aiii th a aes a 80  HIBCC Barcode eerie uae enaa ain Ea E SAAREEN RAAT NR TS 81  EMBARC DBarcodes 81   5 Positioning and Repeating A 83   Positioning Data  83  Horizon
40.  Ratios other than 1 4  however  do  not meet the United States Postal Service specifications for POSTNET  barcodes     AIAG Barcodes       The AIAG barcode style is used by the automotive industru  It is actually a  Code 39 style with no check digit and is encoded according to the AIAG  specification     Example  The Graphics Pass   AMO505000   IFONTS S 104IBARC AIAG E AIAG BAR CODE  AG   prints     III ONNEN A OS ji  AIAG BAR CODE    HIBCC Barcode    HIBCC Barcode    The HIBCC barcode style is used by the health industry  It is actually a Code  39 barcode with a check digit  If the human readable text is printed  it is  bracketed on either side by an asterisk  Lower case letters cannot be used    with the HIBCC barcodes     Example  The Graphics Pass   AMO5050004IFONT S 104GAIBARC HIBCC B HIBCC BAR    CODE  G    prints     L     HIBCC BAR CODEX         EMBARC Barcodes    The EMBARC barcode style is used in the paper industry  EMBARC is a Code  39 barcode without a check digit     Example  The Graphics Pass   AMO5050004IFONT S 104IBARC lt EMBARC E  12345674G        prints     VO Nal JI     1234567       81    Chapter 4 Postnet Barcodes    82    5 Positioning and Repeating    Positioning Data       This chapter discusses the formatting and positioning commands provided by  Code V     Horizontal Tab       The Horizontal Tab command allows the user to specify the current print  position relative to the left margin  When issued outside a pass  it sets the  default left margin fo
41.  Row   YY   Vertical or Horizontal Dot Position    NOTE  A column and row position  two XX YY selections  must be specified  to locate the specific character cell where printer output will begin  and or end     The decimal point must be present when specifying dot positions  within a cell     Within the command structure the starting row is defined first followed by the  starting column     This same format can be used to specify the distance between duplications of  a specific element on a form horizontally and vertically  In this case the row  and dot position indicate how far to move to the next print position     See    Horizontal Duplication Command    on page 167 and    Vertical  Duplication Command    on page 168 for examples      153    Chapter 9 PGL Command Set Standards    Data Types       There are four data types used in PGL   e Fixed  template form description    e Overlay  interactive    e Dynamic  mailing lists     e Incremental  automatically updated information such as check numbers   order numbers  etc       Double Density Printing  DARK Parameter        The DARK parameter is available in the Alpha  Reverse  and Barcode  commands to produce darker text  backgrounds  and barcodes  When the  parameter is enabled  horizontal DPI increases from 60 DPI to 120 DPI  This  fills in the holes between multiple dot columns causing darker output     Figure 3 shows how Double Dot Density provides a darker print  This  improves the readability of characters and barcodes  
42.  This command creates a window on the form in which a Dynamic  Incremented Alphanumeric String will later be entered in the EXECUTE  mode  The window is assigned a number  IAFn  that will be used in  EXECUTE mode to identify in which window the string will print  To create a  window on a form  use the following basic command when creating a form        This command is identical to the Static Dynamic Alphanumeric string  command except for the following parameters     Table 11  Dynamic Incremental Alphanumeric String Command       Field    Function    Option Modifier Selections          IAFn     Defines the field as an  incremental alphanumeric  string and assigns it an  identification number that  will be used to call it up for  use in EXECUTE mode     Enter IAF to signify that the field is incremental  dynamic alphanumeric data  then replace n with  the identification number  1 255               Specifies the maximum  number of characters in  the dynamic alphanumeric  field        Enter a value from 1 280        166    Form Length Commands  Create        When you originally set up your form  one of the optional parameters sets the  form length in dot rows  Using the following commands you can change the  Form Length to a specific number of lines        And       NOTE  Each command specifies an LPI as well as a Form Length  However   these commands do not change the LPI  They simply specify a form  length in lines measured in different dot row heights  The LFORM6  command set
43.  act as terminators as well  as performing their normal functions     123    Control Sequences    Valid Control Sequences       The following eleven control sequences are valid in Barcode Block Character  Mode     AA Move the Home    AB Select Horizontal Barcode    AC Select Vertical Barcode    AD Select Double Density Block Characters   AM Select Normal Density Block Characters   AN Select New Introducer    AR Relative Cursor Move    AS Signed Cursor Move    AT Absolute Cursor Move    AU Set Unit Line    AW Set Barcode Density      A   Move The Home   Moves the Home pointer and homes the cursor   Command    A home NL   Arguments     home  The distance to move the Home pointer down in  increments of 0 01 inches  Default is the current  vertical position     AB   Select Horizontal Barcode  Selects horizontal barcode and sets barcode parameters   Command    B type   height   size   option NL    Arguments  AB Selects Horizontal Barcode Command    type  The style of Barcode  default   1    1   Code 39  2   Code 39 with Check Digit added   3 5   Not used   6   Two of five with 2 1 Ratio   7   Interleaved Two of Five with 2 1 Ratio   8 9   Not used   10   Two of Five with 3 1 Ratio   11   Interleaved Two of Five with 3 1 Ratio   12   UPC Version A  10 Data Digits  13   EAN 13  14   EAN 8   height  Height of the individual bars in increments of 0 01    inches  ranging from 1   255  default   80       size      option     Valid Control Sequences    Scale factor affecting both height 
44.  beginning of the    pass the characters are to begin printing  The xx is  the justification in increments of 0 1 inches  0 25  cm  from 00 to 99  the d indicates an additional  number of dot rows to justify down  from 0 to 9 dot  rows      The Graphics Pass     M03030000PT   JO30ION   prints     OPT  ION    AJO30 Sets current print position to 0 3 inches below the  top of the pass     Pass Height    Pass Height       This function changes the height of block characters and barcodes within a    Graphics Pass   Command 4Hxx  Arguments   AH    XX    Pass Height Command    New window height in increments of 0 1 inches   0 25 cm  from 01 to 99  The actual height ranges  from 0 1 to 9 9 inches  0 3 to 25 2 cm      Example  The Graphics Pass     M0402000GRA H02PHIC   prints     AM  04  02  00    GRA  AH  02  PHIC    GRAFH IC    Horizontal orientation of characters    Window height of 0 4 inches  1 02 cm    Window width of 0 2 inches  0 51 cm     No justification down    No additional dot row justification down    Data to be printed at 0 4 inches  1 02 cm  high   Indicates a change in character height    New character height of 0 2 inches  0 51 cm    Data to be printed at 0 2 inches  0 51 cm  high     85    Chapter    86    5    Positioning Data    Pass Width       This function changes the width of block characters within a Graphics Box   Command    Wxx  Arguments   AW Pass Width Command    XX New window width in increments of 0 1 inches   0 25 cm  from 01 to 99  The actual width r
45.  code 20  Example    10 REM code UPC E with HRI   20 LPRINT CHR  27     11      30 LPRINT CHR  26    P3 111  CHR  25     40 LPRINT CHR  20    01234567   CHR  20    50 LPRINT CHR  27     10      0   123456      249       Chapter    250    11 Data Formats of Barcode Types                                  Code UPC E Without HRI  Syntax    Check  Figures  n  Number  c  Start Code Stop Code   ASCII  0  to  9  Calculation SCH S     see    Check  hex  30 to 39 Number 3A 3A  dec  48 to 57 Calculation    58 58   on page 258   Data Structure  ASCII DC4 Start code nnnnnnnc Stop code DC4  hex  14 Start code nnnnnnnec Stop code 14  dec  20 Start code nnnnnnnc Stop code 20  Example    10 REM code UPC E without HRI    20 LPRINT CHR  27     1211      30 LPRINT CHR  26    Q3 111  CHR  25         40 LPRINT CHR  20  50 LPRINT CHR  27     210                    nt       01234567    CHR  20         Code Delta Distance  IBM                                   Code Delta Distance  IBM   Syntax  Figures Characters  n  Start Code Stop Code   ASCII  Q  to  9  and  A  to  Pr DEZ    D     hex  30 to 39 and 41 to 46 46 44  dec  48 to 57 and 65 to 70 70 68   Data Structure   ASCII DC4 Start code n   n Stop code DC4   hex  14 Start code n   n Stop code 14   dec  20 Start code n   n Stop code 20   Example    10 REM code delta distance  IBM  without HRI  20 LPRINT CHR  27    211      30 LPRINT CHR  26    R3 111  CHR  25     40 LPRINT CHR  20   F0123D    CHR  20    50 LPRINT CHR  27     10      251    Chapter 1
46.  default reset value is 0  which  means that the field will not be reset           161                Chapter 9 PGL Commands  Table 10  Fixed Incremental Alphanumeric String Command  Field Function Option Modifier Selections  This parameter defines See the explanation following this table on how  ESTARTDATAG  the starting incremental to construct the increment information field   field           162    STEPMASK  Increment Information Field           The STEPMASK parameter defines the size  amount of increment and which  positions in the field will be incremented  Valid entries for the STEPMASK field  are 0 9  L  and any other character     0 9    These values dictate the amount of the increment for a selected position in  the incremented field     L    This character indicates that the selected position will not be incremented but  the positions on the right and left of this character remain linked and will  increment the specified amount     Any Other Character    These characters indicate that the selected field position will not be  incremented and that any position to the left and right of this character are not  linked  Fields to the left and right of this character can only be incremented  independently     There is one exception to these rules  If the first character after the semicolon  preceding the STEPMASK parameter is a minus sign     or a plus     sign  the  printer does not include it as part of the STEPMASK  It translates it as an  increment direction command  
47.  depends on the SCALE Command  You may also use the XX YY format for  plotting duplication print locations explained earlier in the Standards Section     SR     Plots the starting ROW of the logo     Enter a value ranging from 1 to one less  than the maximum form length  then end  the entry with the parameter delimiter           SC     Name    STOP       Plots the starting COLUMN of the  logo     Specifies a previously defined logo  for printing     Command Terminator        Enter a value ranging from 1 to one less  than the maximum form width  then end  the entry with the parameter delimiter     Enter the logo name exactly as entered  when defining and storing the logo     Enter STOP and the printer waits for a new  command  Leave STOP out and the  printer will wait for another LOGO  Command        180       Change LPI Command  Normal and Execute     Change LPI Command  Normal and Execute        This command selects an LPI setting for printer output  This command affects  all printing in PGL mode except Overlay data  It will not reset the value  selected in the printer menu system  when you are not using the PGL option   printer output is configured according to the settings in the pritner multi level  menus     el 1PL   n      Table 20  Change LPI Command          Field Function Option Modifier Selections  9 LPI  Command Specifier  Change LPI Enter the current Special Function Control  Command  Character followed by LPI  then end the    entry with the parameter delimiter   
48.  each block character printed  the  distance moved being dependent upon the block character cell width  The  cursor does not move when printing barcodes since the length of the Barcode  symbol depends upon details of the Barcode type selected  Therefore  when  printing barcodes it is necessary to use the Cursor Control Sequences to  properly position the cursor     Upon exiting from the Barcode Block Character Mode  the cursor will remain  pointing to its current vertical position     129    Chapter    Barcodes    7    Barcodes       Barcodes can be printed either vertically or horizontally from 01 to 2 55 inches  high  The Barcode styles can now be defined individually     Code 39  Types 1 And 2        Character Set  0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ      space            Data Limits   No limits are imposed by your printer  However  Barcode readers are typically  limited to 32 characters    Check Digits    No limits for Type 1  Type 2 encodes one check digit at the end of the  character string     Emulation Limitations       Your printer does not support the full ASCII character set in this emulation  If a  character outside of the specified character set is received  it is encoded as a  solid black character  It is possible to encode the character pair representation  of all characters in the full ASCII set  see Table 6   For example  if your reader  is in the full ASCII Mode  a lower case    a    may be encoded by using  A  see  Table 6  top of column 4   Any of the low
49.  for top and bottom borders is 0 1 inches   0 25 cm  with no additional dot columns     Line length for right and left borders is 2 5 inches   Thickness for top and bottom borders is 4 dot rows     Thickness for right and left borders is 6 dot  columns     Dashed Lines    Example 4  The Graphics Pass   M0202000   LB0090000901 1GRAPHICS    prints the following box and characters     RAPHICS       ALB The Box command  0090 Horizontal length of box is 0 9 inches   0090 Vertical height of box is 0 9 inches   1 Thickness of top and bottom borders is 1 dot row   1 Thickness of right and left borders is 1 dot column   GRAPHICS Data to be printed with each character is 0 2 inches   0 51 cm  square   Form Drawing  Description The GPL Form command is used to draw boxes with vertical lines    Command    Arguments    ineside  The height of the vertical lines is restricted to the vertical  dimensions of the box  and the maximum thickness of each line is  limited to nine dot columns     The Form command has the following format   ALFhhhdvwvdhvilldt     G    ALF  hhh    VVV    The Form command    Horizontal dimensions of the box in 0 10 inch  increments from 001 to 132  0 1 to 13 2 inches      Additional horizontal dimensions of the box in  dot columns  ranging from 0 to 9     Vertical height of the box in 0 10 inch increments     Additional vertical height of the box in dot columns   ranging from 0 to 9     Thickness of the two horizontal borders of the box  in dot rows  ranging from 1 to 
50.  forms    Draft  NLQ  OCR A  and OCR B typefaces in various sizes    Predefined symbols such as copyright      and registered trademark        A plot mode     All extensive command set providing total control over the formatting and  printing of graphics images     Chapter 1 Graphics Processing Language    Graphics Processing Language       The Graphics Processing Language  GPL  consists of a set of commands  that are used to print graphics images such as block characters  barcodes   lines  and boxes  as well as provide formatting control for the correct  placement of these images  Relatively complex images may be created  through the use of a few simple commands     The original version of QMS Code V  version 1  differs slightly from the  current version  version 2   The primary difference between the two is in the  way vertical justification commands are implemented  Specifically  version 1  used an approximation for 0 1 inch that has been made more precise in  version 2  If you are running an application designed for version 1  the printer  can be switched to a mode that can emulate it     Graphics Mode       For the printer to recognize GPL commands  it must first be placed in  Graphics Mode  When the printer is in Graphics Mode  the printer scans the  data received from the host for GPL commands  passing non Graphics data  to the current emulation  When the printer is not in Graphics Mode  Code V is  disabled and will not search the incoming data for GPL commands     Gra
51.  individual barcodes        If you are using    interactive EXECUTE Mode  use the following code to initiate printing        Overlay Data    Overlay data can be entered while  in EXECUTE mode onto  predefined forms  It is variable  interactive Alphanumeric data that  is entered into predefined locations  by using tabs and spaces to  position it horizontally and Line  Feeds  Form Feeds  and EVFU  programs to position it vertically   Paper Movement Comamnds  initiate printing of the buffer  contents     Enter tabs  spaces  line feeds  form feeds   and EVFU channel selections to position  the data then enter the data string    Refer to your Operator Application Manual  for information on EVFU operations        Form Feed       This command is used to print the  remainder of the current form and  move the print location to the top of  the next form    When you use this command the  EVFU program remains the same        Enter Form Feed Command           Use the following commands to initiate printing of the last form and leave EXECUTE Mode        176       Box Command  Create     Table 17  EXECUTE Form Command Optional Parameters                                        Field Function Option Modifier Selections  Line Feed A Line Feed command must Enter Line Feed Command  separate the Execute Sequence  from the NORMAL command     NORMAL Initiates printing of last form and Enter the current Special Function Control  returns printer to NORMAL Mode  Character followed by NORMAL   NOTE  Do
52.  logo name     Numeric Variables       Some command parameters may include numeric variables  When it is  required  an appropriate numeric value must be entered  In optional  parameters where a numeric variable appears  the numeric variable needs to  be included only if the option is selected     Comments       Comments that aid in preparation or maintenance of a form or logo may be  added to command lines that do not contain the SFCC  They must be  preceded by a slash         Print Position Location       PGL provides a method of placing the print position at any location on a page  by selecting a character column or row  and a dot position within the specified   starting or ending print location  character cell  In commands that initiate  printing of alphanumeric characters  barcodes  etc   there are optional  methods you may use to select a vertical character column and dot position   and a horizontal character row and dot position     When selecting a vertical character column and dot position  the format is the  same as for selecting horizontal character row and dot position  The row or  column is defined first followed by the dot position  The only difference  between the two is the range of allowable dot positions     Each character cell is 6 dot columns wide  0 5  by 12 dot rows high  0 11    The format for specifying character cell  in a row or column  and dot position   within the specified character cell  is as follows     XX  YY   where    XX   Character Column or
53.  name gt  G lt data    Arguments   AFORM C Buffered Form Create Command     lt form name gt  The name for the form being created and stored   This name can be up to twelve characters long  If  this name is already taken by an existing buffered  form  the newly created form will replace it     AG Command Terminator    lt data gt  Commands and data to be stored  including data  fields  if any     A Marks the end of the data sequence that follows the    AIFORM C command     Example 1  The command     IFORM C1234G4M10100001234      stores the  Graphics Pass    M1010000123   in memory and names it 123     Example 2  The command      IFORM CTEST 11G1M05050001 006  1  stores  the Graphics Pass    M0505000xxxxxx  in memory and names it  TEST 1  the xxxxxx signifies six bytes in memory that are to be  filled in by the data field of the Buffered Form Execute command   If the Execute commmand data field contains ABCDEF  then the  data string ABCDEF will print as 0 5 x 0 5 inch block characters  horizontally across the page in response to the  M0505000  command     Buffered Form Execute       The Version 2 Buffered Form Execute command is used to print command   data sequences defined previously by a Create command  This command  prints the corresponding form stored in memory and inserts the data into the  appropriate data fields  if any  as the buffered form is printed  The Execute  command has the following form     Command    IFORM E lt form name gt    G lt data gt    G   Arguments  A
54.  not forget to include a Line  Feed before this command   Box Command  Create   This command is used to construct boxes at different locations on the form   The basic command for creating a box is   Table 18  Box Command  Field Function Option Modifier Selections  BOX This is the command specifier  Enter BOX    Using the following parameters  creates a box that expands down  and to the right from the starting  point at a specific line thickness        LT        Dictates the line thickness        Line thickness is based on dot increments   1 72     horizontally and vertically  Line  thickness is only limited by your  specifications  Do not forget the parameter  delimiter        The SR  SC  ER  and EC parameters use the same methods for defining the BOX Print area   Whether in columns or dots depends on the SCALE Command  You may also use the XX YY  format for plotting duplication print locations explained earlier in the Standards Section              SR  Plots the starting ROW of the box  Enter a value ranging from 1 to one less  than the maximum form length and the  parameter delimiter    SC  Plots the starting COLUMN of the Enter a value ranging from 1 to one less       box        than the maximum form width and the  parameter delimiter        177          Chapter 9 PGL Commands    Table 18  Box Command    Field Function Option Modifier Selections          ER  Plots the ending ROW of the box  Enter a range ranging from 2 to one less  than the maximum form length and the  par
55.  prints   Ip  if    12345 67 890Z    Vertical without OCR characters   C2 80 1 lt CRLF gt  12345 67 890 lt CRLF gt   prints           A    133    Chapter 7 Barcodes    Two of Five with 2 1 Ratio  Type 6        Character Set0 1234567890    Data Limits No data limits  Invalid characters are encoded as a solid black  character     Examples     Horizontal with OCR A Characters  1B 80 1 3 lt CRLF gt  2598760 lt CRLF gt   prints        Vertical without OCR Characters     6 80 1 lt CRLF gt 2598760 lt CRLF gt  prints     It    134    Interleaved Two of Five  2 1  Type 7     Interleaved Two of Five  2 1  Type 7        Character Set0 123456789    Data Limits An even number of digits  If an odd number of digits or invalid  characters are sent  the last digit and invalid characters will be  encoded as a solid black character     Examples     Horizontal with OCR A characters     B7 80 1 3 lt CRLF gt  012345678 lt CRLF gt   prints        Vertical without OCr characters  1C7 80 1 lt CRLF gt  0123456789  lt CRLF gt   prints     135    Chapter 7 Barcodes    Two of Five with 3 1 Ratio  Type 10     Character Set0 123456789    Data Limits None  Invalid characters are encoded as a solid black character        Examples     Horizontal with OCR A Characters  B10 80 1 3 lt CRLF gt  2598760 lt CRLF gt   prints        Vertical without OCR Characters     C10 80 1 lt CRLF gt  2598760 lt CRLF gt  prints     136    Interleaved Two of Five  3 1  Type 11     Interleaved Two of Five  3 1  Type 11        Chara
56.  readable Special Data    113    Chapter 6 Predefined Forms    MINT4  Human readable Special Data  TASTE4  Human readable Special Data  GREEN    Human readable Special Data    Green Mint Gum  Inc 4   Human readable Supplier Address    Weld    prints  see next page      114         H  D M       Primary Metals Form    HLF Fae        PS    A  il il hi      aa    T T gin d d ill Hit   d       8267 26 635    NR NR  MUA A la  kt   ai  S 934    115    Chapter 6 Version 1 Buffered Formatting    Version 1 Buffered Formatting       This section discusses only the Version 1 commands for buffered formatting   Version 2 commands are discussed on page 99     Buffered Form Create       Version 1 Buffered Form creation and execution differs from Version 2 in that  there is no Version 1 Execute command  Instead  all data sent after the  Create Command is plugged into the data fields of the created form until a  G  is encountered  The Version 1 Buffered Form Create command is     Command    B4  lt data gt   lt execute data gt   G  Arguments    AB   Indicates the beginning of a buffered format  sequence      lt data gt  GPL commands and data to be stored as a  Buffered Form  As with Version 2 Buffered Forms   the Version 1 Buffered Form  lt data gt  may contain  data fields of the form     nnn     A Indicates the end of the buffered format sequence   All characters following the      are inserted into the  A nnn data field until the printer sees  G     This command allows only one form to be st
57.  received     Pass Format    The Printer uses a Heap Buffer to process the pass for printing  If a Graphics  Pass is so complex that processing it overflows the available Heap Buffer  space  the Printer aborts processing and announces a Heap Overlfow fault     Pass Format       A single Graphics Pass Command is formatted like this   Command   M  U  V or E hhwwijd lt data gt         Arguments      M  U  V  or Ej The braces       indicate that either M  U  V  or E  must be used  This notation is used throughout the manual to  indicate that a choice must be made  The braces themselves are  not literally part of the command     The M  U  V  and E determin the orientation of the data to be  printed  For example     Horizontal Orientation   M     Prints data across the page right side up     AM Example    Upside Down Orientation     U     Prints data across the page upside down     a  duex3 nv    Vertical Right Orientation     V     Prints data down the page and roated 90 degrees clockwise so that the  baseline faces the left margin of the paper     ajdwexy Av    23    Chapter 1 Graphics Pass    Vertical Left Orientation     E     Prints data down the page and roated 90 degrees counterclockwise so that  the baseline faces the right margin of the paper     AE Example      y       WW    jjd    The height of each individual barcode or block character  This  dimension is measured vertically on the page and is specified in  increments of 0 1 inches  0 25 cm   The allowable height for ea
58.  s  are listed below     AIFONT S  If issued inside a pass  the specified font is changed for the  duration of the pass  If issued outside a pass  the font is changed  to the specified Code V font both inside and outside passes     AS  Valid only inside a pass  this command changes the font of the  characters in the current pass to the specified Code V font     MH Valid only outside a pass  this command changes the font of the  characters outside passes to the specified Code V font     Wie Valid only outside a pass  this command changes the emulation  font  thus affecting Code V outisde of pass characters and  characters printed after exiting Code V     Code V Character Set Selection       40    All emulations and Code V have two character sets  upper  eigth bit high  and  lower  eigth bit low   For all Code V fonts  the default lower character set   characters 20   7F hex  is US and the default upper character set  characters  AO   FF hex  is Latin1  Complete charts for the US and Latin1 character sets  are available in Appendix F  Table 46  on page 287     The CVCC font lower character set may be selected within Code V by using  the    ISO command  The Code V font upper character set cannot be changed  and is always Latin1  Changing the character set via the control panel does  not alter the Code V character sets  The effects of the    ISO command are  described below     e When AIISO is sent inside a pass   The selected ISO character set  also called language in the Code V
59.  set 1  25 2 User defined character set 2  26 3 User defined character set 3  27 4 User defined character set 4  28 5 User defined character set 5  29 6 User defined character set 6  30 7 User defined character set 7  31 8 User defined character set 8       An optional POINT parameter has been added to the ALPHA command  The  structure of this command is now the following     ALPHA    R E Cn Afn L Rot U case D  POINT  X1 X2 X3 X4   text     STOP    The POINT parameter is used to change the units of the horizontal and  vertical expansion parameters  X3 and X4   When POINT is specified  the X3  and X4 parameters are interpreted in 1 72 of an inch  points   If this parameter  is specified  the E and Cn parameters should not be used     317    Appendix L _20 CPI Support In PGL    20 CPI Support In PGL    20 CPI text can now be selected from the ALPHA and DENSITY commands   Use C20 in the ALPHA command and 20 in the DENSITY command        SCALE Command Modifications In PGL       The SCALE command has been modified in the following manner        Field       Function       Option Modifier  Selections          Dot Scale Placement                specifies the vertical DPI  used to place elements on  the form        SCALE  This is the command Command Identifier  specifier    DOT Specifies that placement Enter DOT to specify a dot  will be done using a measurement scale  dot scale   dot columns and dot    rows      HORZ An optional parameter that   Enter the horizontal DPI   specifies t
60.  the SCALE Command  You may also use  combination of columns and dot the XX YY format for plotting duplication  positions  print locations explained earlier in the  Standards Section   element Defines the element that will be Enter print information in proper format        duplicated   You may define a line  call a logo or  a barcode  etc           167       Chapter 9    PGL Commands    Table 12  Horizontal Duplication Command                                          Field Function Option Modifier Selections  HDUP OFF Termines Horizontal duplication Enter HDUP OFF  mode   NOTE  You may embed Horizontal Duplication commands within Vertical  Duplication commands  but you cannot embed Horizontal Duplication  commands within Horizontal Duplication commands   Vertical Duplication Command  This command allows you to duplicate specific elements vertically on a form   such as lines  logos  barcodes  etc  The basic command is     VDUP    dups    dist    Table 13  Vertical Duplication Command  Field Function Option Modifier Selections  VDUP  Command Specifier Enter VDUP   dups  Specifies number of duplications  Enter the desired number of duplications   The valid range of values is 1 255  Make  sure there is enough room on the form for  the duplication s  to print   dist Specifies the distance from the Enter a column or dot distance or a  starting point of one element to the   combination of columns and dots   next duplication  This parameter Whether in columns or dots depends on  may 
61.  thickness of    horizontal and vertical lines     Horizontal Line Command       Table 29  Horizontal Line Command       Field    Function    Option Modifier Selections       HORZ    This is the command specifier  The  following parameters define print  location and line thickness of a  horizontal line     Enter HORZ       LT  Dictates the line thickness  Horizontal line thickness is based on dot  increments  1 72      Line thickness is only  limited by your specifications    HE Horizontal expansion amount  Enter a value specifying the desired          expansion factor  then end the entry with  the parameter delimiter  Valid selections  range from 0 113  A selection of 0 returns  you to standard size characters     The SR  SC  and EC parameters control placement  length  and thickness of horizontal lines on a  form  Whether in columns or dots depends on the SCALE Command  You may also use the  XX YY format for plotting duplication print locations explained earlier in the Standards Section              SR  Plots the starting ROW of the line  Enter a value ranging from 1 to one less  than the maximum form length and the  parameter delimiter    SC  Plots the starting COLUMN of the Enter a value ranging from 1 to one less   line  than the maximum form width and the  parameter delimiter    EC Plots the ending COLUMN of the Enter a value ranging from 2 to one less       line        than the maximum form width        194       Horizontal And Vertical Line Commands  Create     Table 
62.  vertical  separation between the repeated pass def  the def strings appear on  separate lines because of the      Pass Terminator     AM101000def    Second Graphics Pass with data and Pass  Terminator     Example 2  This example has three levels  The nested repeat commands     AIREPV 2 0504G  AMO101000Level A      AIREPH 2 1504G   M0101000 T003Level B      AIREPV 3 0204G  AM01010004T005Level C        AIREPE      AIREPE      prints   Level     Lewel 8 Level  amp   leed C level C  Level E Leue  C  Level    Level E  Led f  Level  amp  Lewel E  Level E Level C  Level C Level      Level C Level       93    Chapter    5 Automatic Increment Decrement    AIREPV 2 0504G    Level A    This command causes Level A and all the following  passes to be repeated twice vertically  with a  spacing of 0 5 inches     Printed data     AIREPH 2 1504G    ATOO3    Level B    This command causes Level B and all other  Graphics Passes within this level to be printed  twice horizontally with a spacing of 1 5 inches     Tabs the two columns of Level B data 0 3 inches  from the left margin     Printed data     AIREPV 3 0204G    ATOO5    Level C    this command causes Level C to print three times  vertically with a spacing of 0 2 inches     Tabs the two columns of Level C data 0 5 inches  from the left margin     Printed data     Automatic Increment Decrement       94    Data items within a repeat sequence can be increased or decreased in  predetermined amounts using the following increment or decrement 
63. 1  98  Vertical Repeat  Repeating Data Version 2  91  Vscale Parameter  Graphic Category  295   Vscale Parameter  PGL Graphic Parameters  150    W    Width  barcodes  62  Z    Zero Parameter  Graphic Category  295  Zero Parameter  PGL Graphic Parameters  150    327    328    255557 001A                         
64. 1 Data Formats of Barcode Types                Code 128  Syntax  Figures Characters  n  Start Code Stop Code  ASCII  Table 45 on page 253   hex  None None  dec                       Data Structure   ASCII DC4 nn DC4  hex  14 n  n 14  dec  20 n  n 20    Description    While many barcode styles are limited to numbers  Code 128 can encode  numbers  letters  and other symbols commonly found on keyboards  such as  O    and    The Code 128 barcode is similar to three barcodes in one  The  three barcode styles are called Code A  Code B  and Code C  Each barcode  style is designed to encode certain types of data in the most compact way     e Code A encodes uppercase alpha  numeric and control codes   e Code B encodes upper and lower case alpha and numeric codes   e Code C encodes digits in pairs     A single Code 128 barcode may consist of all three Code 128 barcode styles  A  B and C  The printer chooses the styles which result in the most compact  Code 128 barcode for the data to be encoded  Do not be concerned about  choosing the correct barcode styles as this is done automatically     The   gt    greater than  symbol is a special character prefix  If a character with  decimal value less then 32 needs to be encoded  i e   a control character    then send a   gt   followed by the character that is decimal 64 higher then the  control code character     NOTE  Control characters conflict with DC4  SUB  These characters are  encoded by using the   gt   sign following a number that is 6
65. 10 00    112 11 20    11 17     101 10 15    10 08    113 11 32    11 33                         303    Appendix J   Block Character Size Table    304    K Character Sets    The following symbol sets are available in the barcode mode     The LCP symbol sets can only be selected via Escape sequences    The OCR A and OCR B fonts can be selected via control panel or by Escape  sequences  which correspond to the selected emulation mode  The codes  hex AO up to hex FE correspond to the selected character set     The following example shows you how to find the hexadecimal value for a  character from the character set table                    ASCII  B    dec 66  hex 42                                             305    LCP Character Sets    Appendix K    LCP Character Sets       German                                                                                        306    US ASCII    US ASCII                                                                                        307    LCP Character Sets    Appendix K    OCR A  Code Page 437                                                                                         308    OCR B  Code Page 437    OCR B  Code Page 437                                                                                         309    Appendix K _LCP Character Sets    310    L    Addendum to the Line    Printer Graphics  Applications Manual    Postal Barcodes                      Barcode Code V PGL   U S  POSTNET AIBARC POSTNET   barcode PO
66. 2    x 0 2    characters Interrupts will print at the top of the pass  The 0 1    x  0 1    characters Can Be will print 0 3      1 dot row from the top of the pass  The  0 1    x 0 1    characters Confusing will print 0 4      3 dot rows from the top of the    previous pass since Confusing is justified relative to the location of the  Interrupt     In contrast  in the Code V command sequence    AM0202000Interrupts   10434 4M0101031Can Be4_4M0101000Confusing      prints      Interrupts    Can Be  Confusing    The 02    x 0 2    characters Interrupts will print at the top of the Pass  The 0 1    x  0 1    characters Can Be will print 0 7      4 dot rows from the top of the previous  Pass since Can Be is justified relative to the location of the Interrupt  0 4      3  dot rows below the top of the pass   The 0 1    x 0 1    characters Confusing will  print 0 8      4 dot rows from the top of the previous pass     The format for an Interrupt function is     Command    Ixxd    Arguments  A Indicates the Interrupt function   XX Increments of 0 1 inches from the top of the  Graphics Pass down to where data is inserted  The  range is 00 to 99   d Additional distance in dot rows  The range is 0 to 9     NOTE  21000 prints out all of the interrupted passes     Horizontal Repeat  Version 2    Repeating Data       The printed image defined by a sequence of Code V commands and data  may be repeated horizontally and vertically through the use of Code V Repeat  commands  This technique is 
67. 211      30 REM select unsecured mode   40 LPRINT CHR  27    PSCO   CHR  27   WV    50 REM set character size to 5   60 LPRINT CHR  16    5   CHR  25     70 LPRINT  Example for     80 LPRINT CHR  15    LCP   CHR  15     unsecured mode     Example for      C d unsecured mode    Example 2   10 REM LCP secured mode   20 LPRINT CHR  27     211      30 REM select secured mode   40 LPRINT CHR  27    PSC1   CHR  27   WW   50 REM set character size to 5   60 LPRINT CHR  16    5   CHR  25     70 LPRINT  This is    CHR  15    LCP   CHR  15    80 LPRINT   an ex     90 LPRINT  ample of an    100 LPRINT  expres  sion    110 LPRINT  in the secured mode     This is an ex   ample of an  expres  sion    in the secured mode    229    Chapter    11 Barcode    Barcode Printing    Printing       230    Barcode Header       Before the data  which contains the barcode information  are transmitted to  the printer  the barcode header must be sent  Otherwise the standard  parameter values are used  see    Header Format    below   In the header  the  printing parameters   the barcode size and type are defined  This header only  needs to be transferred once  unless settings are to be changed or the printer  has been turned off     Header Format  SUB  F  a  n    xyz  EM  Specification is optional    unregarded at EAN UPC Barcode    For Code 128 and EAN 128  Type S T  only the X parameter is  valid  This is automatically used for the Y parameter  The Z  parameter is not evaluated     Format         X  y  
68. 29  Horizontal Line Command                                     Field Function Option Modifier Selections  STOP Command Terminator  Enter STOP and the printer waits for a new  command  Leave STOP out and the  printer will wait for another Horizontal Line  Command   Vertical Line Command  Table 30  Vertical Line Command  Field Function Option Modifier Selections  VERT Command Specifier  Enter VERT          The following parameters define print location and line thickness of a vertical line  The SR  SC   and EC parameters control placement  length  and thickness of vertical lines on a form  Whether  in columns or dots depends on the SCALE Command  You may also use the XX YY format for  plotting duplication print locations explained earlier in the Standards Section                 LT  Dictates the line thickness  Vertical line thickness is based on dot  increments  1 60      then end the entry with  the parameter delimiter  Line thickness is  only limited by specifications    SC  Plots the starting COLUMN of the Enter a value ranging from 1 to one less   line  than the maximum form width and the  parameter delimiter    SR  Plots the starting ROW of the line  Enter a value ranging from 1 to one less  than the maximum form length and the  parameter delimiter    ER Plots the ending ROW of the line  Enter a value ranging from 2 to one less  than the maximum form length    STOP Command Terminator  Enter STOP and the printer waits for a new          command  Leave STOP out and the  pr
69. 4 00    67 6 65    6 67     40 4 08    4 08    68 6 77    6 83     41 4 20    4 17    69 6 88    6 92     42 4 20    4 33    70 7 00    7 00     43 4 43    4 42    71 7 12    7 08     44 4 55    4 50    72 7 23    7 17     45 4 55    4 58    73 7 35    7 33     46 4 67    4 67    74 7 35    7 42     47 4 78    4 83    75 7 47    7 50     48 4 90    4 92    76 7 58    7 58     49 5 02    5 00    77 7 70    7 67     50 5 13    5 08    78 7 82    7 83     51 5 25    5 17    79 7 93    7 92     52 5 25    5 17    80 8 05    8 00     53 5 37    5 42    81 8 05    8 08     54 5 48    5 50    82 8 17    8 17     55 5 60    5 58    83 8 28    8 33     56 5 72    5 67    84 8 40    8 42     57 5 72    5 57    85 8 52    8 50     58 5 83    5 83    86 8 63    8 58     59 5 95    5 92    87 8 75    8 67     60 5 95    6 00    88 8 75    8 83     61 6 07    6 08    89 8 87    8 92          302       Table 47  Block Character Size                                  Expansion Character Character Expansion Character Character  Factor Height Width Factor Height Width  90 8 98    9 00    102 10 15    10 17     91 9 10    9 08    103 10 27    10 33     92 9 22    9 17    104 10 38    10 42     93 9 33    9 33    105 10 50    10 50     94 9345    9 42    106 10 63    10 58     95 9 45    9 42    107 10 73    10 67     96 9 57    9 58    108 10 85    10 83     97 9 68    9 67    109 10 85    10 92     98 9 80    9 83    110 10 97    11 00     99 9 92    9 92    111 11 08    11 08     100 10 03    
70. 4 dec   higher than the control character     252    Code 128    Example    If you need to print a Carriage Return  hex 0D  dec 13   as part of a barcode   send   gt M   13   64   77  see character set table to verify that decimal 77  equals the capital letter  M    This substitution process can be carried out  throughout the range of decimal values  i e     gt d   decimal 100  equates to the  dollar symbol  decimal 36   If the greater than symbol must be transmitted   send   gt 0   the O will not be part of the printed data      The Code 128 barcode style selection can also be done manually  This is  done by adding a style selection character to the beginning of the barcode  data  Choose code A  B  or C from the table of special characters below     Table 45  Special Characters                         character   Code 128     0 30      lt       51 95  S2    96    gt 3    97  S 98  25    99  Code C      6 100  Code B   S7    101  Code A       gt 8    102             When a style selection has been made  character data will be translated from  the selected code style to the Code 128 repesentation  See Figure 11 on  page 254     253    Chapter 11 Data Formats of Barcode Types                                                                                                                      Wert   Code A   Code B   Code C Wert   Code A   Code B   Code C  0 Space   Space 00 36 D D 36  1     01 37 E E 37  2   RW 02 38 F F 38  3     03 39 G G 39  4     04 40 H H 40  5     05 41   
71. 414 Human readable serial number  123414 Barcoded serial number  Gravel Products4   Human readable special characters  AG      Primary Metals Form    which prints        Primary Metals Form       Similar to the AIAG form  the Primary Metals form utilizes both barcode and  human readable characters to create a standard label for shipping and  identification  The barcode portions of this form can be printed in either the  High Density or Low Density mode     The command to select Half Dot Mode is METALS_H MT   The command to select Full Dot Mode is METALS_F MT   The following rules apply when using the METALS forms     1  If a data field is not completely filled with data  the data for that field must  be terminated with     A   or       2  If the data field requires both a human readable field and a barcode field   the same value must be sent for both fields     111    Chapter    112    6    Predefined Forms    The data sent to fill the METALS forms will sequentially fill the following data  fields     Product Identification    The first field  up to 15 characters  is printed as human readable characters   The second field  up to 15 characters  is printed as barcoded data     Supplier Number    The third field  up to 11 characters  is printed as human readable characters   The fourth field  up to 11 characters  is printed as barcoded data     Serial Number    The fifth field  up to 15 characters  is printed as human readable characters   The sixth field  up to 15 characters  i
72. 59    Chapter 11 Data Formats of Barcode Types    260    UPCA    11 numbers are transferred for the UPCA code  The 12  digit represents the  check number  The even figures of the information have a factor of  3   the  uneven figures a factor of  1   Counting begins from the left  The resulting  cross sum is divided by 10  The remaining figure is subtracted from the modul   10   If the remainder is  0   the check number is also  0      Example  Information 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 3  Factor 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3  Product 12  0   3   2  9  4   1  6  21  8   27    Cross sum 107       10  modul    7  remainder    3  check number     For remainder    0    the check number is also    0        UPCE    For the UPCE barcode type  seven numbers are transmitted  The 8  digit is  the check number  The uneven figures of the information have a factor of  3    the even figures a factor of  1   Counting begins from the left and the resulting  cross sum is divided by 10  The remaining integer value is subtracted from the  modul  10   The result is transmitted as the check number  c      Example  Information 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 5  Factor 3 1 3 1 3 1 3  Product O 1 6  3 412  5   18  Cross sum 45       10  modul    5  remainder    5  check number     For remainder    0    the check number is also    0        EAN 128    Add On 5    Six numbers are transmitted  check number  c    5 information items  n   The  uneven figures of the information have a factor of  3   the even figures a factor  of  1   Countin
73. 9     Thickness of the two vertical borders of the box in  dot columns  ranging from 1 to 9     Horizontal positioning of the first vertical line from  the left margin in 0 10 inch increments from 001 to  132  0 1 to 13 2 inches      55    Chapter    56    3    Form Drawing    Example 1     AG    Additional horizontal positioning of the first vertical  line in dot columns  ranging from 0 to 9     Thickness of the first vertical line in dot columns   ranging from 1 to 9     Represents a repeat of the llldt command for each  additional vertical line to be printed  The distance  between each vertical line is additive  i e   each  additional vertical line is placed relative to the  previous line  not from the left margin     Command Terminator    The Graphics Pass    LF030001501 10050010100101003 G prints  the following box and vertical lines     ALF  0300    0150    AG    The Form command    Horizontal box dimension of 3 0 inches with no  additional dot columns     Vertical box dimension of 1 5 inches with no  additional dot rows     Thickness of each horizontal border is 1 dot row   Thickness of each vertical border is 1 dot column     First vertical line is positioned 0 5 inches from left  edge of box     No additional dot columns added to position of first  vertical line     Thickness of the first vertical line is 1 dot column     Second vertical line is positioned 1 0 inches from  the first vertical line     No additional dot columns added to position of  second vertical lin
74. 9    Printronix Schweiz GmbH   42 Changi South Street 1  Changi South Industrial Estate  Singapore 486763   Phone   65  6542 0110   Fax   65  6546 1588    Printronix Commercial  Shanghai  Co  Ltd  22F  Eton Building East   No 555  Pudong Av    Shanghai City  200120  P R China  Phone   86  400 886 5598   Fax   86 21  5138 0564    Visit the web site at www tallygenicom com    ASCII Chart    NUL ASCII Character  KEY Hex   0 0   Decimal    NUMBERS  CONTROL UPPER CASE   LOWER CASE  B4 B3 B2 B1 SYMBOLS  Data Link  0000 NUL Escape SPACE 0 p  00 0 10 DLE 16  20 32   30 48   40 64   50 80   60 96  70  112  Start of Header Device l  SOH Control One   1 a q  01 1 11 De 17  21 33   31 49 61 97  71 113  Devic  0010 SAGI Toant Control Two B b r  02 2 12 PC2 48 42 66 62 98  72 114  End of Text Device  0011 ETX Control Three CG s  03 3 13 DC3 49 43 67 73 115  End ot Device  Transmission   Control Four   D T d t  04 EOT 41 14 DCs 20   24 36 44 68   54 84  64 100   74 116  Enqui ativ  0101 ENa    Eet   e     05 5 15 NAK 21   25 101 75  Positive Synchronous  Acknowledge idle  amp   06 ACK 6 16 SYN 922   26 70   56 86  66 102  76       Alarm ne Ter Biock  0111 BEL  23   27 39   37 55 147 71157 87 67 103  77  Back Ge ert  8 18 24   28 40   38 56   48 72   58 88  68 104  78  09 9 19 ER 25 29 41139 57   49 73   59 89 69    Line Feed Substitute    LF SUB  OA 10 1A 26    Vertical Tab Escape  VT ESC      11118 27   2B  Form Feed Ee    12 16  Gi 28       al a  Carrriag  pi  oD CR 13 to e 29  Shit Our  
75. 9   PDF   STOP   BARCODE  C3 9 VSCAN H10 DARK 5 50   CODE 39   PDF   STOP   END    Output     LO    CODE 39       215    Chapter    216    10 PGL Barcode Commands And Output    Code 128B       BARCODE    Sample CREATE Code 128B Program     CREATE 128B  BARCODE  C128B DARK 5 1   CODE 128B        Q  O  el  El  OS  E  N  CO  D                                        A A        123B_BARCODE       IRAN       CODE  128B_BARCODE    OU     Code 128C    Code 128C           BARCODE    vs    PDF    LOC             Sample CREATE Code 128C Program     CREATE 128C  BARCODE  C128C DARK 5 5   1234567891     C128C  VSCAN H10  DARK  5  50   1281281281    PDF   STOP   END                         TTS   a 7  Sees ou  1234567891 EH      AO y  AS  CIS  ES    217    Chapter 10 PGL Barcode Commands And Output    EAN 8       BARCODE       Sample CREATE Code EAN 8 Program     CREATE   CODEEAN8  BARCODE  EAN8   DARK  5  1   1234567          1234567        Output     1234  5678                               218    EAN 13    EAN 13       BARCODE       Sample CREATE Code EAN 13 Program       CREATE   CODEEAN13  BARCODE  EAN13 DARK 5 1   1234567    PDF   STOP   BARCODE   EAN13   VSCAN H10  DARK  5  50   1234567    PDF   STOP   END    Output                      IN    Po       A    219    Chapter 10 PGL Barcode Commands And Output    Interleaved 2 5                 BARCODE    VSCAN     MAG   Hn    BFmL  D       Sample CREATE Interleaved 2 5 Program     CREATE  12 5  BARCODE  T 2 5 DARK 5 1   123456789        
76. 97 FNC 2 FNC 2 96   98 SHIFT SHIFT 98   99 CODE C CODE C 99   100 CODE B FUNC 4 CODE B  101 FNC 4 CODE A CODE A  102 FNC 1 FNC 1 FNC 1                   Accessing POSTNET in CVCC    Postnet Barcodes       POSTNET barcodes are now available to all Code V users  You can now print  POSTNET barcodes on envelopes or any printer output desired  The United   States Postal Service defines POSTNET Barcodes in USPS Publication  25   A Guide To Business Mail Preparation     Because of the strict specification requirements  POSTNET barcodes differ  from other barcodes in several ways  These differences are discussed below  following instructions on accessing POSTNET in Code V     Accessing POSTNET in CVCC    To access POSTNET in Code V  use the following command   ABARC POSTNET N 980321        Orientation       By using a Graphics Pass command  you may position a POSTNET barcode  anywhere on your printer output   See Chapter 1  page 15  for instructions  onusing Graphics Passes   Since POSTNET barcodes are intended to be  read by Postal Service scanners  you should position your barcodes where  they may be easily read  USPS Publication  25 tells you where to position  POSTNET barcodes     Height    The Postal Service requires that POSTNET barcodes be a specific height  but  you do not have to enter the correct height value when you use a Graphics  Pass  When you enter a Graphics Pass command to position a POSTNET  barcode  the correct height is automatically chosen for you  Any other hei
77. A   caret hyphen  OD CR  A   caret period  OE SO  A   caret slash  OF Sl  20 10 DLE    11 DC1  A2 12 DC2   3 13 DC3  WI 14 DC4   5 15 NAK   6 16 SYN   7 17 ETB   8 18 CAN       Ignore Data    Control Code Equivalents    Table 1  Control Code Equivalents                   Control Code Equivalents Hex ASCII  AQ 19 EM  A   caret colon  1A SUB  A   caret semicolon  1B ESC  A lt   caret left arrow  1C FS  A   caret equal sign  1D GS  A gt   caret right arrow  1E RS  A   caret question mark  1F US                      The Ignore Data command causes the printer to ignore all data  except for the  command to turn Ignore Data OFF   This allows comments or other that is not  to be printed to be inserted into the document for information purposes     Format  AX lt data gt  A    AX Ignore Data On Command  The printer will ignore all data after  this command except for the Ignore Data Off Comand   A      lt data gt  Data that the printer will ignore     AA Ignore Data Off Command  The printer will not accept all  subsequent data received from the host     Graphics Pass       A Graphics Pass begins with a Pass Start  AM   U   V  or  E  and ends with a  Graphics Pass Terminator  Pass Start  CR  LF  FF      or 4    Any characters  placed between the Pass Start and Pass Terminator will print as block  characters  Also  all GPL Graphics Image commands  such as the Bar Code  and Line Drawing commands must be sent within a Graphics Pass  Each  Graphics Pass is treated by the printer as a set of 
78. A Y Y   X1B Y Y   X1 5 Y Y  X2 Y Y Y Y Y   X2A Y  X3 Y Y Y Y Y  X4 Y Y Y Y Y   Hn  Height Expansion     Optional parameter that specifies height expansion of barcode and human  readable character output  Adjustments are made in 0 1 inch increments   The valid range of selections is 4 to 99  0 4 to 9 9 inches   The default value is  0 9 inches     Enter  H followed by the desired expansion amount   Examples    H1   Expansion of 0 1      H20   Expansion of 2 0      H45   Expansion of 4 5       207    Chapter 10 PGL Barcodes  Used in CREATE Mode Only     BFn L  Dynamic Barcode Data Field     Optional field that identifies location and the length of a dynamic Barcode  field  To select this parameter     Enter BF followed by     n to identify the barcode data that will be located at the coordinates  specified by the SR and SC parameters  The valid range of  values is 1 255     L to specify the number of characters in the dynamic barcode field   The length of the dynamic string must be less than or equal to the  value signified by the L parameter  This value is not used for  Barcodes with fixed length data fields  EAN and UPC barcodes      If this option is enabled  do not enter static barcode data in the optional data  field     Dark  Dark Printing     Optional parameter that enables DARK Printing  See    Half Dot Mode  Double  Density     on page 36     Enter  DARK or D to initiate double density printing     SR  Staring Row   This parameter specifies the Starting Row of the barc
79. After the first minus sign additional minus  signs will be treated as any other character     STARTDATA  incremented Field        The STARTDATA parameter defines the starting incremental field  This field  can be no larger than the STEPMASK field  It can  however  be smaller than  the STEPMASK field  If it is smaller  the printer will right justify the field and  insert enough spaces to equalize field sizes  Valid entries for each position in  this field depend on the increment information in the STEPMASK     If STEPMASK   0 9  Valid STARTDATA is   e A Z  upper and lower case    e 0 9   e Space character    If the STEPMASK is not 0 9  then any character may be used for  STARTDATA     STARTDATA  incremented Field     The following examples show various ways the STEPMASK may be set up  and the result each setup has on a field of data     Example Key     SM   STEPMASK   SD   STARTDATA   RPT   SD Repeat Count  RST   SD Reset Count    Example 1  Incremental  linked alphanumeric Subfields  Default RPT  1  and    RST  0    ALPHA Printer Output  I 1 1 0 0 00001   ABCO1   ABCO1  SM   00001 RPT  1 ABCO02  SD   ABCO1 RST 0 ABCO3   ABC  ABCIO  ABC99  ABDO00  ZZZ99   AAAOO    Example 2  Non incremental position with nonlinked subfields  Default RPT   1  and RST  0     ALPHA Printer Output  1 1 1 0 0 0001X0  ABCO0 14 ABCO0 1  SM   0001X0 RPT  1 ABC1 1  SD   ABCO 1 RST  0 ABC2 1  ABC9 1  ABDO 1  ZZZ9 1  AAAO 1    163    Chapter 9 PGL Commands    Example 3  Non incremental subfield with Link
80. Box Command  PGL Commands  177  Box Command  using  179  Boxes  drawing  53  Buffered Form Copy  106  Buffered Form Create  100  116  buffered form create  116  Buffered Form Delete  104  Buffered Form Execute  100  Buffered Form List  105  Buffered Form Repeats  106  Buffered Form Reset  104  Buffered Formatting  Version 1  116  Buffered Forms  99  buffered form create  100  buffered form execute  100  control code command changes  101  copy  106  data fields  99  delete  104  list  105  repeat  108  repeats  106  reset  104    320    C    Call LOGO Command  PGL Commands  180  Case  Special Function Control Character  151  change  18  Change CVCC   using ESC sequences  18   using the control panel  18  Change LPI Command  PGL Commands  181  Change SFCC Command  PGL Commands  182  Character Printing  27   block character fonts  37   Code V character set selection  40   Code V font selection  40   compressed fonts  41   control panel option  27  46   Default Font Selection  43   Descender Mode  32   Draft Fonts  44   Dump Mode  45   Font Quality Speed  44   Half Dot Mode  Double Density   36   Half Tone  34   Hex Command  45   ISO Character Set Table  47   ISO Character Sets  46   Lines Per Inch  45   NLQ Fonts  42   Reverse Image  33  Character Sets  305   LCP Character Sets  306  Chart  ASCII  269  Codabar Codes in PGL  Line Printer Graphics  314  CODABAR  Data Formats of Barcode Types  241  Code 11  Data Formats of Barcode Types  238  Code 128 Barcode  72  Code 128 Special 
81. Character Set Table  47   ISO Character Sets  46    L    Large Character Printing  Data Formats of Barcode  Types  263  LCP Character Set  German  264  US ASCII  264  LCP Character Sets  German  306  OCR A  308  OCR B  309  US ASCII  307  LCP Printing  Barcode  225  Light Bar Ratios  70  Line Drawing  49  dashed lines  51  solid lines  49  Line Printer Graphics  311  20 CPI Support in PGL  318  barcode rotations in PGL  315  Codabar Codes in PGL  314  Code 128A Barcodes in PGL  314  ISET Commands in PGL  316  new barcode fonts in PGL  315  Postal Barcodes  311  SCALE Command Modifications in PGL  318  user defined barcode rotations in PGL  315  USET Commands in PGL  316  Line Terminator  Special Function Control  Character  151  Lines  49  Lines Per Inch  character printing  45  Lines  drawing  49  LOGMARS Barcode  72    324    Logo Command  PGL Commands  187  Logo Names  Special Function Control  Character  152  Logos  58  271   Version 1  58   Version 2  59    M    Menu Operations  PGL  147   Mixing Barcode Block Characters  144  Modplot  291   MSI  PGL Barcode Commands  221   Multiple Passes  GPL Commands  25  Multiple Repeat Commands  Repeating Data  Version 2  92    N    New Barcode Fonts in PGL  Line Printer  Graphics  315   NLQ Fonts  42   Normal Command  PGL Commands  197  Normal Density   M  Examples  Block  Characters  141   Numeric Variables  Special Function Control  Character  153    O    OCR A  LCP Character Sets  308  OCR B  LCP Character Sets  309  Orientation
82. Character sizes less than 02 or 03 will cause the barcode height to assume  the minimum value  i e   0 2 inches without HRC and 0 3 inches with HRC      Barcode Width       The width of a barcode is a function of the number of data characters to be  encoded  the style of barcode  and the bar space ratios     Barcode Version 1    Barcode Version 1       The Version 1 command for printing a barcode is     Command Default Ratio   B C ax lt data gt    4G  Variable Ratio   B C a9x lt ratio gt  lt data gt    G    Arguments    ABC B to print a horizontal barcode  or C to print a  vertical barcode     a One of the following characters     B  prints the OCR B font three dots below the  barcode     N  turns OFF auto printing   O  turns ON OCR auto printing   S  prints OCR A 0 10 inch below the barcode   T  prints OCR B 0 10 inch below the barcode   Y  turns ON OCR A auto printing    9 Selects the variable ratio feature     x The character from Table 3 that corresponds to the  desired barcode style      lt ratio gt  A sequence of bar space ratios of the form r1r2r3r4  or r1r2r3r4r5r6r7r8  where r variables take on  values 00 through OF  hexidecimal      lt data gt  The data to be encoded   AG Command Terminator  Example 1  The Graphics Pass    M05150004BNA12345G   prints     A    4M0515000 Turns ON the Graphics Pass Mode  The barcode  height is 0 5 inches and the vertical justification is O                      inches   AB Indicates the barcode orientation will be horizontal   N No huma
83. Characters  75  Code 128  Data Formats of Barcode Types  252  Code 128A Barcodes in PGL  314  Code 128B  PGL Barcode Commands  216  Code 128C  PGL Barcode Commands  217  Code 2 5 Industrial  Data Formats of Barcode  Types  236    Code 2 5 Interleaved  Data Formats of Barcode  Types  237   Code 2 5 Matrix  Data Formats of Barcode  Types  235   Code 39  130   Code 39 Type 1 Examples  132   Code 39 Type 2 Examples  133   Code 39  PGL Barcode Commands  215   Code BCD Matrix  Data Formats of Barcode  Types  239   Code Delta Distance  Data Formats of Barcode  Types  251   Code EAN 13 with HRI  Data Formats of Barcode  Types  244   Code EAN 13 without HRI  Data Formats of  Barcode Types  245   Code EAN 8 with HRI  Data Formats of Barcode  Types  242   Code EAN 8 without HRI  Data Formats of Barcode  Types  243   Code MSI Modify Plessey  Data Formats of  Barcode Types  246   Code UPC A with HRI  Data Formats of Barcode  Types  247   Code UPC A without HRI  Data Formats of Barcode  Types  248   Code UPC E with HRI  Data Formats of Barcode  Types  249   Code UPC E without HRI  Data Formats of Barcode  Types  250   Code V Character Set Selection  40   Code V Command Character  18   Code V Command Character Parameter  293  Code V Font Selection  40   Command Characters  Special Function Control  Character  152   Command Presentation  PGL Commands  157  Command Set  PGL  151   Command Summary Table  Industrial Graphics  Application  145   Command Summary  Industrial Graphics  Application 
84. Characters  n  Start Code Stop Code  Not fixed  Not fixed   recommended  recommended   ASCII  Q  to  9    A  to  D  and na  to  e  and na    to  e  and            Kag KE g   wn  n   TE Wen  n   Hr  Wen  hex  30 to 39 and 61 to 65 and 61 to 65 and  24  2B  2D  2E  2F  3A 6E  74  2A 6E  74  2A  dec  48 to 57 and 97 to 101 and 97 to 101 and  36  43  45  46  47  58 110  116 42 110  116 42  Data Structure  ASCII DC4 Start code n   n Stop code DC4  hex  14 Start code n   n Stop code 14  dec  20 Start code n   n Stop code 20  Example    10 REM codabar barcode   20 LPRINT CHR  27    211     30 LPRINT CHR  26   40 LPRINT CHR  20   50 LPRINT CHR  27    210        G3 111  CHR  25       123   CHR  20      241                            Chapter 11 Data Formats of Barcode Types  Code EAN 8 With HRI  Syntax    Check Separation  Figures  n  Number  c  Start Code Code Stop Code  ASCII  0  to  9  Calculation E ES KE  see    Check  hex  30 to 39 Number 3A 3A 3A  dec  48to57   Calculation    58 58 58  on page 258                             Data Structure   ASCII DC4 Start code nnnn Separation code nnnc Stop code DC4  hex  14 Start code nnnn Separation code nnnc Stop code 14   dec  20 Start code nnnn Separation code nnnc Stop code 20    Example   10 REM code EAN 8 with HRI   20 LPRINT CHR  27     11      30 LPRINT CHR  26    H3 111  CHR  25     40 LPRINT CHR  20    0123 4567   CHR  20    50 LPRINT CHR  27     10      GET    4567    242    Code EAN 8 Without HRI                   Code EAN 8 Witho
85. Condensed print   DC4 Reset expanded print   ESC P  lt n gt  Proportional spacing ON OFF  ESC P  In Barcode Mode  the barcode sequences have priority     Pica    The barcode interpreter can be swited on or off with the MTPL sequences  ESC    11    Barcode ON  and ESC     10    Barcode OFF   The typical  transmission procedure should take place as follows     e Barcode Interpreter ON    e Transmit mode specification  barcode header  LCP header  secured   unsecured mode         e Transmit barcode   LCP  e Barcode OFF    NOTE  The mode specifications are saved temporarily and must only be sent  to the printer once  The specification remains valid until the printer is  switched off     Note the following explanatory information     Every sequence description begins with a header in which the function and  short form of the sequence of the barcode Types are listed  e g         2 5 Matrix Type A             The header is followed by the data structure in ASCII  hexadecimal and  decimal representation with the necessary parameters  e g      ASCII DC4 start code n  n stop code DC4  hex  14 start code n  n stop code 14  dec  20 start code n  n stop code 20    The syntax for the parameters  the start  separate and stop code is  represented as follows     Table 42  Syntax Parameters                            Figures  n  Start Code Stop Code  ASCII O to 9      hex  30 to 39 3A 3A  dec  48 to 57 58 58          Special Features    For the parameter  n   a distinction must be made between 
86. DPI vertically  and 60 DPI horizontally  The maximum size of the grid is 252 dot rows  3 5  inches  by 240 dot columns  4 inches   When defining the grid  it is best not to  exceed the actual requirements needed to produce the logo  For example  if  your logo is going to be 1 inch high by 1 5 inches tall  the grid would be the  same size in dots  72 by 90   The basic command for creating a logo is            LOGO    Name    VL    HL          187    Chapter 9    PGL Commands    Table 24  CREATE LOGO Mode Command       Field    Function    Option Modifier Selections          Loco     Initiates Create LOGO Mode     Enter the current Special Function Control  Character followed by LOGO  then end the  entry with the parameter delimiter        Name     Enter the name of the Logo in this  field     LOGO names are allowed a maximum of  eight characters  The follownig ASCII  characters may be used in form names       Upper and lower case A   Z   HEX 41   5A and 61   7A       Number 0   9  HEX 30   39   e Dollar sign    HEX 24    e Percent Sign    HEX 25    e Dash    HEX 2D    e At son O  HEX 40    e Braces      HEX 7B and 7D   e Parens     HEX 28 and 29   e Tilde    HEX 7E    e Single quotes          Hex 60 and 27   e Exclamation point    HEX 21   e Pound sign    HEX 23    e Amersand  amp   HEX 26     NOTE  Make sure your LOGO name is  not identical to one that is already  stored in memory  the new LOGO  will replace the old LOGO if this  happens        VL     Vertical size of the Gri
87. F gt  DEF  R0 12  lt CR gt   M4 4  lt CR gt  4RO0  12 lt CR gt GHIARO 12   lt CR gt  4M2 2  lt CR gt   R0  12  lt CR gt  JKL lt CRLF gt  prints     DEF GHI x    The  R command defines both the top and eight of each block character     NOTE  The control sequence    RO XX  lt CR gt  moves the cursor up  for  negative XX values  or down  for positive XX values  in multiples of  0 01 inches     When planning the position for the next character  the cursor is always  referenced at the top of the next character cell  The total distance to be moved  equals a multiple of the current block character height as defined in the    M  parameter     In this example the value 12  from    RO 12  multiplied by the current block  character height 6  from    M6 6    72 100 inch  This is the distance that the  cursor moves down from the top left corner of the character cell following the     P    to the baseline     The value  12  from    RO  12  multiplied by the current block character height  4  from    M4 4   48 100 inch  This moves the cursor to the top of the left corner  of the    G    for the beginning of the    GH     print sequence     Other Size Variations       AM2 4 lt CRLF gt  WIDE lt CRLF gt  prints     LI IDE     M4 2 lt CRLF gt  TALL  lt CRLF gt  prints     TALL     M2 6  lt CRLF gt  WIDER lt CRLF gt  prints     iF DOE F    Double Density   D  Examples    AM6 2  lt CRLF gt  TALLER  lt CRLF gt  prints     TALLER     M2 4  lt CRLF gt   R0 36  lt CRLF gt  WIDE  M4 2  lt CRLF gt   R0
88. FORM X       DELETE LOGO X  DENSITY X X  DIRECTORY X       END X  EXECUTE    x lt        EXPAND X X       HDUP       HORZ  IAFn       IBFn       IGOFF  IGON       XI XxX  XxX  XxX  Xx    ISET  LFORM  LISTEN X    X  XxX XxX  X       LOGO  Call  X  LOGO  Create        LPI       NORMAL  PAGE X  QUIET       RESET X X  REVERSE       SCALE       SFCC  SFOFF  SFON       XxX XxX  XxX  XxX    USET                156       Command Presentation    Table 8  Supported PGL Commands             NORMAL CREATE EXECUTE  PGL Command Mode Mode Mode  VDUP X  VERT xX                   Command Presentation       Each command is presented in a table  see Figure 4  showing the command  in its basic form followed by a breakdown of the command into its required  and optional parameters  Required parameters are unshaded and optional  parameters are shaded  All parameters must be entered in the sequence  given     Table Key    In the command and parameter tables  see Figure 4   there are a few  conventions to follow to help interpret the command structure     e   Special Function Control Character  SFCC    S Es Alphanumeric text string delimiter   e    Parameter delimiter     The tables show the individual commands  their basic construction  and valid  selections where required  In addition  each command is marked as to which  PGL Mode s   NORMAL  CREATE  and EXECUTE  they can be used in     Some commands consist of several command lines  Some command lines  are long  resulting in some of the lines wrapp
89. Half Dot Mode  Double Density     Half Dot Mode  Double Density        36    The Half Dot Mode causes the printer to print at 120 DPI horizontally  the  standard print density is 60 DPI   Printing at 120 dpi results in darker printing  and reduces the stairstep effect of diagonal lines  It is most often used to  improve barcode readability  The Half Do Mode can be toggled ON and OFF  within a Graphics Pass using the command     Command    KF lt data gt    KF    Arguments  AKF Toggles Half Dot Mode ON    lt data gt  Data to be printed in Half Dot Mode   AKF Toggles Half Dot Mode OFF     Example  Halt Dot characters can be mixed with regular characters  The  Graphics Pass    M0303000 KFHALF KFDOT MODE   prints     HALF DOT MODE    AKF Turns ON Half Dot Mode   HALF Data to be printed in Half Dot Mode   AKF Turns OFF Half Dot Mode     DOT MODE Data to be printed in regular density     Half Dot Mode And Half Tones       Half Dot mode  Double Density  can be intermixed with half tones to produce  a greater variety of shades     Example  The Graphics Passes    M0303000 KLEAGRAPHIC   KH     AM03030404KHAKFOPTIONSKF4KH   prints        OPTION    e First Graphic Pass    M0303000 KLEAGRAPHIC   KH     AKL Turns ON Half Tone Mode    EA Selects EA half tone pattern   GRAPHIC Data printed in the selected pattern   AKH Turns OFF Half Tone Mode     7 5 CPI    e Second Graphics Pass      M0303040   KH4KFOPTION KF4KH      AKH    AKF  OPTION    AKF  AKH    Block Character Fonts    Toggles Half To
90. IFORM E Buffered Form Execute Command   lt form name gt  The name of the form stored in memory     AG Command Terminator    Example     Control Code Command Changes     lt data gt  Data to be entered into the data fields of the  Buffered Form     AG Command Terminator    To print the form defined as TEST 1 in Example 2  page 100   send the following command     AIFORM ETEST 14GABCDEF4 4G  This would print ABCDEF as 0 5 x 0 5 inch block characters     ABCDEF    Control Code Command Changes       Within the Buffered Form Execute  lt data gt  field  the             A  and     commands do not perform their usual functions  but instead behave as  described below     A     At    Ak    Causes unfilled portions of the current data field to be padded  with spaces  This is used if there are insufficient data characters  to fill the current field  The entire data field is converted to spaces  if this is the only input in the field     Deletes any unused portions of a data field  No data will be  printed in the data field if this is the only input in the field     This is identical in function to the      function  in that it causes the  rest of the current data field to be padded with spaces  The entire  data field is converted to spaces if this is the only input in the  field  All remaining fields in the buffer are also converted to  spaces unless the fields occur within a Copy Command  as  described in the    Buffered Form Copy    on page 106      This command performs a line feed unl
91. L   Argument     xsign  The distance to move horizontally in increments of  0 01 inches  Positive values move the cursor right   and negative values move it left  Total distance  must be in the range 0 1320  default   0       ysign  The distance to move vertically in increments of  0 01 inches  Positive values move the cursor down   and the negative values move it up  Total distance  must be in the range 0 9999  default   0      AT   Absolute Cursor Move    Moves the cursor relative to the home position in increments of fixed positive  value  negative values are not allowed      Command 4T xx   yy NL  Argument     xx  The distance to move horizontally in increments of  0 01 inches  Total distance must be in the range 0   1320  default   0       yy  The distance to move vertically in increments of  0 01 inches  Total distance must be in the range 0   9999  default   0      AU   Set Unit Line    Sets the distance that the paper moves in response to the line feed function   The cursor will move a distance equal to the current line height x the current  height multiplier  provided that LF is not used as a Terminator      Command U x NL  Arguments   x  Amount of paper movement     1  Default    line height that was current when  Barcode Block Character mode was entered      2  1 8 inch line height  8 LPI    3  1 6 inch line height  6 LPI      127    Chapter    128    7    Control Sequences    AW   Set Barcode Density    Sets the print densities and dot making rules for Barcode pri
92. Matrix  239   Code Delta Distance  251   Code EAN 13 with HRI  244   Code EAN 13 without HRI  245   Code EAN 8 with HRI  242   Code EAN 8 without HRI  243   Code MSI Modify Plessey  246   Code UPC A with HRI  247   Code UPC A without HRI  248   Code UPC E with HRI  249   Code UPC E without HRI  250   EAN 128  257   German  264   Large Character Printing  263   US Postnet Barcode  262   US ASCII LCP Character Set  264  Data Processing  PY PN  297  Data Types  Special Function Control  Character  154  Data  Repeating  89  Default Font Selection  43  Delete Form Command  PGL Commands  191  Delete Logo Command  PGL Commands  191  Density Command  PGL Commands  192  Density  barcodes  62  Descender Mode  33  Descender Mode  character printing  32  Descender Mode  reverse image  33  Descender Parameter  Graphic Category  295  Directory Command  PGL Commands  192  Dot Slew  Positioning Data  87    322    Double Density   D  Examples  Block   Characters  143   double density printing  Special Function Control  Character  154   Draft Fonts  44   Dump Mode  character printing  45   Duplication Commands  PGL Commands  167  169  Dynamic Incremented Alphanumeric Strings  PGL  Commands  166    E    EAN 128  Data Formats of Barcode Types  257  EAN 13  PGL Barcode Commands  219   EAN 8  PGL Barcode Commands  218   EAN 13  Barcode  139   EAN 8  Barcode  140   EMBARC Barcode  81   Emulation Limitations  Barcodes  130   Entering Barcode  Industrial Graphics  Application  122   EXECUTE Mode  PGL
93. Normal              cecceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeseeeeteas 192  Expanded Print Command  Normal and Execute               0 0  193  Horizontal And Vertical Line Commands  Create   194  Ignore Commands  Normal  Create  and Exvecutel  196  Normal Command  Normal and EXECUTE Mode                        197  PGL Mode Control    197  Reset Command  Normal and Execute    ooococoncocccccccccncnccconacinnos 198  Scale Command  Create    ooococccocccinocccononccnnancnnannccnana nana ocananananns 199  Select Format  SF  Command   Normal  Create  and Execute     ooccconococoncconocccnncooonncnnconnancnncnnnns 200    A eae ha Ree ei ee 201    Table of Contents    TOPGL Barcodes ee EE 205  PGL Barcodes  Used in CREATE Mode On     205  Barcode Command ParameterS     ccconoooccncnonocccnnconnnnnnnnnnannnonnnnnns 205  Data Field Characters          cccccccnncocooonnnnnnnnccnnonnnnnonononononnnnncnnnnnnos 211  Incrementing Barcode Data           ce eeeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeneeeeeeeneaeeeeeeeaas 214  PGL Barcode Commands And Output    215  Code EE 215  Code 128B EE 216  Code O 217  EAN Siam deeg Eelere 218  EAN Busta ns 219  Interleaved 248  220  dE 221  POSTNET cua ostra lan 222  UPC Ee 223  UPC e o 224   11 Barcode And LCP Printing  eseese 225  DATO CU CTION EPAIA we    eds ch cede le ade AEAEE EE A ATE EE 225  Special Features           c ccccccssccccsssseeeeeecseneeeeesseeeeeesseseeeeesssnaeees 227  Secured Unsecured Mode   ccoooooccccconoocccncoonnnnnnonanoncnncnnnnnnnnconannnncninos 228  Barc
94. O  UJ  Z    Supresses printing of human readable characters              315    Appendix L _ISET USET Commands In PGL    ISET USET Commands In PGL       The PGL graphics emulation now supports the ISET and USET commands   The ISET command can be used in NORMAL  CREATE  and EXECUTE  modes and is used to select standard or user defined character sets  User   defined character sets are created with the USET command in NORMAL  mode  These commands have the following format      lt SFCC gt ISET n  Do not use the SFCC in CREATE mode                  lt SFCC gt USETn  ca fa  one to sixteen ca fa pairs   END  Field Description   lt SFCC gt  The special function control character   n The character set number  See the following table for  descriptions of the character sets   ca The ASCII character cell hex address which will be  replaced by the character represented by the font address   fa  parameter  The ca parameter must be equal to one of  the following hex values  21  22  23  24  25  26  40  5B   5C  5D  5E  60  7B  7C  7D  7E   fa The font address of a character that will replace the char   acter located in the character address  ca   This parameter  must be between the hex values 20 and FF                 316    PDF417 in PGL                                           POINT Parmeter In PGL             Die SE Character set  0 US ASCII  1 German  2 Swedish  3 Danish  4 Norwegian  5 Finnish  6 English  7 Dutch  8 French  9 Spanish  10 Italian  11 Turkish  24 1 User defined character
95. O0 as the bar code name     314    PDF417 in PGL    Barcode Rotations in PGL    Barcodes can now be rotated in four different orientations instead of the  former two orientations  VSCAN is still supported to create a 90 degree  counterclockwise barcode  The new parameters are use in place of VSCAN to  allow new rotations  The new parameters are CW to create a 90 degree  clockwise bar code  INV to create an inverted  180 degree  bar code  and  CCW to create a 90 degree counterclockwise bar code        User defined Barcode Ratios in PGL       Bar code ratios can now be defined to control bar code size  The XR and XRD  parameters are used in the same location as the current magnification value  parameter  The XR and XRD parameters are followed by four ratio values   eight for Code 128  UPC  and EAN bar codes      These values specify the narrow bar  narrow space  wide bar  and wide space    widths in printer dots  60 dpi for XR and 120 dpi for XRD   each separated by  a colon  The following example illustrates the usage of the XR parameter     BARCODE  C3 9 XR1 1 2 2 H10 5 1   Code 39    STOP    The previous values for magnification continue to be valid     New Barcode Fonts in PGL    New values have been added to the FONT parameter of the BARCODE  command  The following table identifies the valid values        Value Description       10 CPI ASCII  12 CPI ASCII  13 CPI ASCII  15 CPI ASCII  17 CPI ASCII  20 CPI ASCII  10 CPI OCR A  10 CPI OCR B                   N X O  lt   A  D 
96. P   CHR   15    PRINT  1  STRING   5  10     END       LCP LCP LCP    LCP Character Set US ASCII  LCP Character Set German       Data Structure   US ASCII Character Set   ASCII ESC  pi    Le  Ss   o  UN ESC  Y  hex  1B 50 AC 53 30 31 1B 5C  dec  27 80 76 83 48 49 27 92  German Character Set   ASCII ESC  P   L  15   o   2  ESC  Y  hex  1B 50 4C 53 30 32 1B 5C  dec  27 80 76 83 48 50 27 92                            Example 1   10 LPRINT  Example for different LCP character sizes   20 LPRINT CHR   27      11      30 LPRINT CHR   27    PSCO   CHR   27         40 REM set character size to 3   50 LPRINT CHR   16    3   CHR   25     60 LPRINT CHR   15    3   CHR   15     70 REM set character size to 4   80 LPRINT CHR   16    4   CHRS  25     90 LPRINT CHR   15    4   CHR   15     100 REM set character size to 5   110 LPRINT CHR   16    5   CHR   25     120 LPRINT CHR   15    5   CHR   15     130 REM set character size to 6   140 LPRINT CHR   16    6   CHR   25     150 LPRINT CHR   15    6   CHR   15     160 LPRINT CHR   27      10     170 END    264    LCP Character Set US ASCII LCP Character Set German    Example for Different LCP Character Sizes    3456    Example 2    REM Example 2 for unsecured printing  OPEN  lpt1   FOR RANDOM AS  1    WIDTH  PRINT  PRINT  PRINT  PRINT  PRINT  PRINT  END                                                                     1    L   I   iy  1   1   1     255   CHR   27      11      CHR   27    PSCO   CHR   27    X     CHRS  16    5   CHR  25     
97. Q Fonts    Example 1  The command   6OCR A characters     prints     OCR A characters    Example 2  The commands    M0202000GRAPHICS PASS    4 4 24   COMPRESSED FONT   prints     GRAPHICS PASS    COMPRESSED FONT       42    The NLQ fonts use 0 10 inch high Gothic characters whenever high quality  print or high density is desired  NLQ fonts are limited to Horizontal Orientation  only  and the NLQ Font command must be contained within a Graphics Pass   If the NLQ Font command is outside of a Graphics pass  it is interpreted as a  Horizontal Repeat command  see Repeating Text later in this manual   The  NLQ font is in effect only until the next command is received     Any horizontal tabs and justification functions  see    Positioning and  Repeating    on page 83  used with NLQ characters should be used prior to the  ASn command  If a Tab or Justification Command is encountered within the  NLQ characters  the selected NLQ Graphics font is terminated and a Block  Character font is substituted for the remaining printable data     To select one of the NLQ Graphics fonts  send the following command   Command    Sn  Arguments   ASn The NLQ Font Command    n NLQ Font    1 for 10 CPI   2 for 12 CPI   3 for 13 3 CPI   4 for 15 CPI   5 for 17 1 CPI   6 for OCR A  10 CPI   7 for OCR B  10 CPI     Example 1  The Graphics Pass    M0000000   S1A line of text      1 10th inch  NLQ characters at 10 CPI  prints     A line of text    15 CPI    Example 2  The Graphics Pass    M0000000   S1A line 
98. STNET   U S  PLANET AIBARC PLANET barcode PLANET   U K  4 State AIBARC UKPOST barcode UKPOST  barcode ROYALBAR   Dutch KIX 4 State AIBARC  KIX barcode KIX  barcode ROYALBAR KIX   PostBar barcode POSTBAR     generic POSTNET              style barcode     PDF417 2 D Barcode       PDF417 is a multi row  variable length symbology offering high data capacity  and error correction capability  Linear scanners  rastering laser scanners  or  two dimensional imaging devices can scan PDF417  One PDF417 symbol is  capable of encoding more than 1100 bytes  1800 ASCII characters or 2700  digits  depending on the selected data compaction mode     Every PDF417 symbol is composed of a stack of rows  from a minimum of 3  to a maximum of 90 rows  Each PDF417 row contains start and stop patterns   left and right row indicators  and from 1 to 30 data symbol characters  Since  both the number of rows and their length are selectable  the aspect ratio of a  PDF417 symbol can be varied to suit spatial requirements for printing    See    PDF417 In Code V    on page 312 to print the PDF417 barcode  sequence     311       Appendix L _PDF417 2 D Barcode    PDF417 In Code V       AIBARC PDF417  lt 1 99 gt   lt 0 9 gt   lt data gt    G  Where      lt 1 99 gt  is the number of desired data columns in the barcode    lt 0 9 gt  designates the error correction level     Number of Error  Correction  Codewords    Error Correction  Level                      64       128  256       512       oO   oi NI OO oa  a w
99. T for low density   e AIAG_F MT for high density   The following rules apply when using the AIAG forms        1  If one of the data fields is not completely filled with data  the remaining  characers for that field must end with     A   or        2  If the data field requires both a human readable field and a barcode field   the same value must be sent for both fields     109    Chapter    110    6    Predefined Forms    Partner Number    The first field  up to nine characters  is treated as human readable characters   The second field  up to nine characters  is treated as barcode data     Quantity    The third field  up to six characters  is treated as human readable characters   The fourth field  up to six characters  is treated as barcode data     Supplier Quantity    The fifth field  up to nine charactersO is treated as human readable  characters  The sixth field  up to nine characters  is treated as barcode data     Serial Number    The seventh  up to nine characters  is treated as human readable characters   The eighth field  up to nine characters  is treated as barcode data     Special Data  The ninth field  up to 55 characters  is treated as human readable characters   Example  To print a high density AIAG form  send   AIFORM EAIAG_F MT4G  Form Execution Command  12345678   Human readable part number  1234567   Barcoded part number  1234  Human readable quantity  1234  Barcoded quantity  123456789 Human readable supplier number  123456789 Barcoded supplier number  123
100. Te Tally Genicom       6600 Series Printers  Applications Manual  Volume 4    Graphics Languages   Code V  PGL  MT660 IG    6600 Series Printers  Applications Manual  Volume 4    Graphics Languages   Code V  PGL  MT660 IG    Te Tally Genicom       Trademark Acknowledgements       Acrobat   Reader is a trademark of Adobe Systems Incorporated   DEC is a trademark of Compaq Computer Corp    Epson is a trademark of Seiko Epson Corp    Genicom is a trademark of Genicom L L C    HP is a trademark of Hewlett Packard Company     IBM and Proprinter are trademarks of International Business Machines  Corporation     Printronix and PGL are trademarks of Printronix  Inc   QMS and Code V are trademarks of Minolta QMS Inc   TallyGenicom brand is owned by Printronix  Inc   COPYRIGHT 2010 PRINTRONIX  INC     Table of Contents    1 QMS   Code V    Graphics Processing    inte UE 15  Graphics Processing Language  16  Graphics Mode eg ee degt eg Seeerei a eka Males 16  Turning Graphics Mode Om    16  PAT dnde 17  Turning Graphics Mode On    17  Code V Command Character  CVCC   18  Changing The  CVG section 18  Free Formal ca 19  Turning Free Format On    19  Turning Free Format OFF  oooocccccncccccnnccnonncnnnancnnnnnnnnonnnn naar nnnnnnnncno 19  Control Code Equivalent     o ooooconccccincccnnoccccnnnccconncnnanrccnanna nana cnn 20  Ignore Data iia titof tetitas 21  Graphics Pasai aan edt aaia cid 21  Pass Spacing  MOdplot    oooococonnccconocicinoccconncccnanccnnnrccnnnrccnonncc cnn 22  Pass Bu
101. To set  e Default form length in dot rows   form length to the default  792 dot rows   do not enter a value in this field     e Automatic form length     Also see LFORM 6 and LFORM 8  Commands              186       Create Logo Command  Normal     Using The Create Form Command    This example shows how to design an employment application form for an  Explosives Handler for a Demolition Company  To enter CREATE Mode and  design a form called JobAppl  send the following command to your printer       CREATE  JobAppl    To enter CREATE Mode and design the same form  send the following  command to your printer       CREATE JobApp     To enter CREATE Mode and assign a Form Length of 10 inches  send the  following command to your printer       CREATE  JobAppl 720    After entering CREATE Form Mode send the required commands to complete  the form     Now that you have informed the printer that you wish to CREATE a form  called JobAppl that is 10 inches long  you can finish creating your form using  the appropriate commands in the CREATE Form Mode     Create Logo Command  Normal        This command allows you to create logos for your forms  It initiates the Logo  CREATE Mode  which enables you to create and store logos that will be  called in CREATE Mode for use in creating forms  Logos are defined using  specific dot placement within a grid     This command names the logo then specifies a grid size for the logo and  which dot positions within the grid will be printed  The grid is 72 
102. UVYXYZ  abcdef ghi klanaparstuvuxyz  0123456789    281    Appendix E     FFOCR A amp B      FF OCR A  amp  B       OCR Ax 10 CPI  ABCDEF GHIJKLMNOPOARS TUVWXYZ  abcdefghi jklmnopaqrstuvwxyz  0123456785    OCR B  10 CPI  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz  0123456789    282    4 FH Draft       DRAFT  7 5 CPI    ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPORSTUUWXYZ  ABCOEFGHI JKLMNOPORSTUULIZYZ  6123456789    Draft  16 CPI    ABITDEF GHIJKL MNDPORST UUNRYZ  abcdefGhisklanoPSrstuvuxsz    8123456789    Draft  12 CPI    ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  abcdefghi jk lmnoparstuvaxy2    0123456789    Draft  13 3 CPI    ABCDEF GHI UKLMNOPQRS TUVWXYZ  abcdefghi jk lanoparstuvwxyz  0123456789    draft  15 CPI    ABCIEFCHIJKLAROPORSTUVUXVZ  abcdef ghi jklenopers tuvuxyz    0123456789    braft  17 1 CPI    ARCBEF CHI JKLINOPORS TUVWXYZ  abcdef ghi sk lenoperstuvuxyz  0123456789    283    Appendix E    4 FH NLQ    A FH NLQ       284    NLQ  10 CPI  ABCDEFGH I JKLMNOPORSTUVIWXYZ  abcdef ghijk Lmnoparstuvuxyz    0123456789    NLQ  12 CPI  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPGRSTUVWXYZ  abcdefshi jk lanoparstuvuxyz    0123456789    NL   13 3 CPI  ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRS TUVWXYZ  abcdefghi jk Lanoparstuvexyz  0123456789    NLO  15 CPI  ABCBEF CHI JSKLANOPRRS TUUEXYZ  abcdet ghi jk Lanopars tuvuxy7    9123436789    RLO  17 1 CPI  ABCIEFOHTIKLMKOPORSTUUUXYZ  abcdef ohi jk lancpqrs tuuyxyz  0123656789    4 FH OCR A  amp  B       OCR A  10 CPI  ABCDEF GHIJKLMNOPARSTUVUXYZ  abcdefghiJklmnopqrstuvwxyz  01234567893    OCR B  10 CPI 
103. a Code 128 barcode and  printed below the barcode as Draft 10 CPI  characters    AG Command Terminator   Third Command        E0505000   T0000   IBARC C128 B  Vert Left G     E0505000 Causes barcode to print vertical left with a height of  0 5 inches   ATOO00 Places the barcode at the left margin   AIBARC C128   Turns ON Barcode Mode and selects Code 128  barcode   B  Prints the character translation below the barcode   Vertical Left Data to be encoded as a Code 128 barcode and    printed below the barcode as Draft 10 CPI  characters     69    Chapter    70    AG Command Terminator    Fourth Command   4V0505000   T0250   IBARC C128 B Vert Right G        AV0505000 Causes barcode to print vertical right with a height    of 0 5 inches   ATO250 Tabs the start of the barcode 2 5 inches from the  left margin   AIBARC C128   Turns ON Barcode Mode and selects Code 128  barcode   B  Prints the character translation below the barcode   Vertical Right    Data to be encoded as a Code 128 barcode and  printed below the barcode as Draft 10 CPI    characters   AG Command Terminator  Dark Light Bar Ratios       The default widths of the light and dark bars that comprise each barcode style  are determined by the ratios given in Table 3  These ratios are read in pairs   with the first number of the first pair being the width of the narrowest bar in dot  columns  and the second number of the first pair being the width of the  narrowest space in dot columns  The second pair of numbers in the rat
104. a sequence is specified in the data section of a Buffered Form Execute  command  The manner in which this is done is best understood by referring to  Example 1 below     The Repeat command has the following format     Command  R  lt data gt  Z      Arguments  ARA Repeat Command   lt data gt  The data to be repeated   AZA  End of Repeat Terminator    Example 1  The Repeat command always occurs within the Buffered Form  Create command data sequence  The number of times to repeat  a portion of the data sequence is specified within the buffered  Form Execute command data sequence     NOTE  The Repeat command is used in the following Code V sequence   AIFORM CEXAMPLE 14G4R4 4M0201000Repeat     0204 4 4 4Z4       ARA  The beginning of the Buffered Format Repeat  command  Everything between the  R   and the  Z  will be repeated     A 020 The data field with a maximum size of 20 bytes   AZA  The end of the commands and data to be repeated     Now we want to execute the Form EXAMPLE1  The first four bytes of the  Execute data field must specify the number of times to repeat the data  sequence between the  R and the  Z  the next 20 bytes will be read from the  Execute data sequence  then the following four bytes specify the number of  times to repeat the data sequence again  and so forth until all the data in the  Execute command is used up     NOTE  Each time the Create data sequence is repeated by the Repeat  command  the same Execute data is used to fill the data field  The  Copy co
105. able on all printers with MTPL emulation   Special firmware may be necessary  Ask your service representative  for details     Secured Unsecured Mode          Unsecured mode ESC PSCO ESC    Secured mode ESC PSC1 ESC         Data Structure    ASCII ESC  mi    Ss       O       o    ESC     Unsecured  hex  1B 50 53 43 30 1B 5C Mode  dec  27 80 83 67 48 27 92    ASCII ESC  mi    Ss       O       q    ESC    V Secured  hex  1B 50 53 43 31 1B 5C Mode  dec  27 80 83 67 49 27 92    Description    In Secured Mode  the amount of space the barcode or LCP character requires  is secured  In each line  additional barcode and normal characters can be  printed     These additional characters are printed in the current line and in the following  lines without influencing the barcode or LCP character  As a result  normal  characters can be printed to the right or left of the barcode or LCP character in  each line     To guarantee successful barcode and LCP character printing  it is important to  insert the correct paper feed commands  so that the paper feed is ensured to  the end of the barcode and LCP height     In Unsecured Mode  the paper feed necessary for barcode and LCP printing  is automatic and is not possible to print mroe than one line with normal  characters in the barcode and LCP line     All characters in the mixed line are printed  so that the bottom edges are  aligned in a straight line     228    Special Features    Example 1   10 REM LCP unsecured mode   20 LPRINT CHR  27     
106. acter table above     Figure 12  Code 128 Translation Table  continued     Code 128    255    Chapter 11 Data Formats of Barcode Types       Example   10 REM code 128   20 LPRINT CHRS  27      11      30 LPRINT CHRS  26     S3 111  CHRS  25     40 LPRINT CHR   20    ABCD0123  CHRS  20    50 LPRINT CHRS   27      10      MOLAND AG    256    EAN 128                EAN 128  Syntax  Figures Characters  n  Start Code Stop Code  ASCII  Table 45 on page 253   hex  None None  dec                       Data Structure   ASCII DC4 nn DC4  hex  14 n  n 14  dec  20 n  n 20    Description    The only difference between both types of barcodes is the initial sequence   Code 128 starts with Code A  Code B or Code C followed by character  information  Barcode EAN 128 requires the code FNC1 between Startcode  and character information  The Code 128 translation table remains valid  The  checksum of EAN 128 is calculated using Code 128 algorythm     Example    10 LPRINT CHRS  27      11     20 LPRINT CHR  26    T3 111  CHR   25    30 LPRINT CHR   20    1234ABCD  CHR   20     40 LPRINT CHRS  27      10      Add On Barcodes    UPC and EAN barcodes  commercial barcodes  can be extended with Add   On barcodes        The following barcodes can be extended with Add On barcodes   Barcode Types H  I  K  L  N  O  P and Q    In the data formats the numbers are generally given in the sequence they are  printed from left to right in the barcode  i e  in the case of the EAN13 code  the  13  figure is transfer
107. acter window  This  dimension is measured vertically on the page and  is specified in increments of 0 1 inches  0 25 cm    The height for each character window ranges from  01 to 99  0 1 to 9 9 inches or 0 25 to 25 3 cm   For  example  a height of 03 means a character window  height of 0 3 inches  0 76cm      ww The width of each printed character window  This  dimension is measured horizontally on the page  and is specified in increments of 0 1 inches  The  width for each character window ranges from 01 to  99  0 1 to 9 9 inches or 0 3 to 25 3 cm   For  example  a width of 10 means a character window  width of 1 inch  2 5 cm      jjd The vertical justification  jj  ranges from 00 to 99   0 0 to 9 9 inches 0 0 to 25 2 cm   The d allows an  additional amount of justification down from 0 to 9  dot rows to fine tune the final positioning  For  example  inserting the value 118 means the  characters are moved down the page 1 1 inches   2 8 cm  plus an additional 8 dot rows  If any of the  jjd is not sent  the printer assumes the missing  values are 0  If any of the jjd is nto sent  the printer  assumes the missing values are 0  For instance   M1010 would have a jjd value of 000      lt data gt  The actual characters to be printed  This data will  print in accordance with orientation  height  width   and justification values        The Pass Terminator    28    The following examples illustrate block character printing   Example 1  The Graphics Pass    M0202000Graphics    prints    
108. ain types of data in the most compact way     e Code A encodes upper case alpha  numeric  and control codes   e Code B encodes upper and lower case alpha and numeric codes   e Code C encodes digits in pairs     A single Code 128 barcode may consist of all three Code 128 barcode styles   the printer chooses the styles which result in the most compact Code 128  barcode for the data to be encoded  Thus  the user does not need to be  concerned about choosing the correct barcode styles since this is done  automatically     The  gt   greater than  symbol is a Special character prefix  If a character with a  decimal value less than 32 needs to be encoded  i e   a control character    then send a  gt  followd by the character that is decimal 64 higher than the  control code character  If control code characters are encoded  then no  numan readable characters will print below the barcode  To send the  gt   character itself  send a  gt 0     Code 128 Barcode    Example 1  The Graphics Pass  AMO505000 IFONT S 10 MBARC C128 E ABCDE   G   prints     HIE HI    Example 2  By adding the greater than symbol to the printable characters of  Example 1  the Graphics Pass   AMO505000   IFONT S 104IBARC C128 E  gt ABCDE   G     prints a  different barcode pattern  indicating that  gt A  decimal 65  now  represents the control code SOH  decimal 1      A    NOTE  The human readable characters did not print under the barcode as it  did in Example 1  above                                            The
109. al and vertical DPI  as the size of block  characters increase  there is a greater disparity between the physical size of  horizontal and vertical output  This parameter allows you to print vertical block  characters larger than size 3 at approximately the same scale as horizontal  block characters     Examples  Size 10 Characters    Vscale OFF    A D  D    Vscale ON    A    Zero Parameter       The Zero Parameter allows you to set all zeros to print as slashed zeros        This makes it easier to distinguish zeros from the upper case letter O  The  default for the Zero Parameter is Slashed     SFCC Parameter       This parameter gives you another method of changing the Special Function  Control Character  The default is the ASCII tilde     HEX 7E  Decimal 126   character     150    9 PGL Command Set    PGL Command Set Standards       To use the PGL commanas  follow a set of standards in constructing the  commands you send to your printer     Special Function Control Character  SFCC        The SFCC identifies Special Function Commands that are used in NORMAL  Mode and Execute Mode  The character you use for the SFCC is based on  the host computer interface requirements of your system  The SFCC must be  a printable character and it must be placed at the beginning of a new line  before the command or data  The default SFCC is    tilde   This character  may be changed using the SFCC Change Command or by accessing the  Configuration menu through the printer control panel     Sinc
110. ameter delimiter           EC Plots the ending COLUMN of the Enter a value ranging from 2 to one less  box  than the maximum form width   STOP Command Terminator  Enter STOP and the printer waits for a new    command  Leave STOP out and the  printer will wait for another BOX  Command              178       Using The Box Command    Using The Box Command       This command allows you to create a series of boxes  each smaller than the  previous box  Make the first box 4    square and make each successive box  smaller by approximately  25     Each box will have a line thickness of 3 points   Start the first box at row 1 and column 1  SCALE   DOT   The finished  program would be      RESET   CREATE   BOX  SCALE  DOT   BOX  3 1 1 288 240  3 22 19 267 222  3 43 37 246 186  3 85 73 206 168  STOP   END   EXECUTE   BOX   NORMAL    Figure 6  Box Samples    If you do not want a closed box around text or the form  but you still want to  set off specific areas on the form  use the Corner command to print corner  frames on your form     179                         Chapter 9 PGL Commands  Call LOGO Command  Create   This command allows you to call a previously defined logo for priting ata  specified place on the form you are creating  The format of this command is   Table 19  Call LOGO Command  Field Function Option Modifier Selections  LOGO Initiates Create LOGO mode  Enter LOGO       The SR and SC parameters use the same methods for defining the LOGO Print area  Whether in  columns or dots
111. ample below there are two Vertical Repeat pairs nested in the  Graphics Pass  Each nested pair comprises a Repeat Level in the Graphics  Pass  The Repeat level at a given point within a Graphics Pass is defined as  the number of Repeat start commands minus the number of Repeat End  commands previously encountered  For instance  the A is at the Repeat Level  2 in the following Code V command sequence       IREPH 2 10 G AIREPV 3 3  G    IREPV 5 2  G   IREPE4M0303A    IREPE   IREPE    Repeat Level 3  Repeat Level 2  Repeat Level 1       NOTE   e There can only be 9999 repeats per repeat level   e The maximum number of repeat levels is 10     e If multiple Repeat Start commands are set  each Start Repeat must be  paired with an End Repeat     e No printing occurs until all Repeat Commands are terminated   Example 1  this Graphics Pass has three Repeat levels         IREPV 2 070 G  lt _ lt   ATREPH 3 100   G Level 1  4M0101000abc       ATREPV 2 0001G Level 2  4M0101000def    ATREPE   Level 3  ATREPE    ATREPE     aba abg ab   KR St Jef d ef   ge Ef ee   det det det    92    Multiple Repeat Commands    AiIREPV 2 0704G  Specifies a Vertical Repeat twice at 0 7 inches  separation    AIREPH 3 1004G    Specifies a Horizontal Repeat three times with a  separation of 1 inch     AMO101000abc      First Graphics Pass with data and Pass Terminator   AIREPV 2 0004G  Specifies a Vertical Repeat of two more times with  no separation     NOTE  Although the    IREPV command specifies O inches of
112. and Character  C VCC  Parameter   Level 2 EE 293  Smooth Parameter  Menu Level 21    293  PY Then Parameter  Menu Level 2     294  PN Then Parameter  Menu Level 21    294  DarkBar Parameter  Menu Level 21    294  Version Parameter  Menu Level 21    294  Descender  Descndr  Parameter  Menu Level 2  Lecces 295    Table of Contents    Zero Parameter  Menu Level 21    295  Vscale Parameter  Menu Level 21    295  PGL Special Function Command Character  SFCC  Parmeter   MentiLevel2  rodena era A E RAEE A aE 295    PY PN Data Processing    297  PN Then Data Processing When PN Then   NONE An 297  PN Then Data Processing When PN Then   ALT    ooocncccnccnccnccnnono   298  PY Then Data Processing When PY Then   NONE  oooccccccccccccnnonno   299  PY Then Data Processing When PY Then    EDM    300  PY Then Data Processing When PY Then   ALL    ooocooiccccnnicnncnnoos   300  J Block Character Size Tables      s saooesneseeenenenn  301  Block Character Size Table    oooconncccnncconnnccnnncnconnncnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnncnnannnnos 301  K ee 305  LCP  Character  Sel unicas 306  COM aaa pb 306  USAS Cll te it 307  OCR A  Code Page A2   308  OCR B  Code Page A2   309    L Addendum to the Line Printer Graphics    Applications Manual  311  Postal Barcodes  cti aida 311  PDF417 2 D Barcode iiri naea aiea a aa atai 311   PDF417 In Code Vii da 312   PDF4I 7 iM E BEE 313  Code 128A Barcodes mbG  314  Codabar Codes in POL 314  UCC EAN 128 Barcodes in POL  314  UPC E0 Bar Codes in POL  314  Barcode Rotation
113. and darkess of  background         4    4      Ge    Normal Dot Density  60 Dots Per Inch 120 Dots Per Inch       Figure 3  Dark Printing    154    PGL Modes    PGL Modes    Four basic modes of operation for the PGL are available  NORMAL  LOGO   CREATE  and EXECUTE        NORMAL    In NORMAL mode  the printer functions in line printer mode  The incoming  data is scanned by the printer for SFCC commands  When the printer  encounters a properly formatted SFCC Command it executes the specified  command     CREATE    The CREATE mode allows you to create forms for use in EXECUTE mode   These forms can include logos  borders  and static text     EXECUTE    The EXECUTE mode allows you to use the forms you have created     LOGO    The LOGO mode allows you to create graphical images for use in forms     PGL Commands    This section discusses the commands that can be used in PGL mode  Many  of the commands may be used in multiple modes and in some instances there  are slight differences in the construction of the command in different modes   When one of these commands is presented  the different modes used be  noted  Table 8 lists all of the commands and the modes in which they can be  used        Table 8  Supported PGL Commands                               PGL Command ees ee E  AFn X  ALPHA  BARCODE  BFn X  BOX  CORNER  CREATE x                      155    Chapter 9 PGL Commands    Table 8  Supported PGL Commands    NORMAL CREATE EXECUTE    POL Command Mode Mode Mode          DELETE 
114. and unit width of  the bars  ranging from 1 8  default   1      Human Readable Characters option  default   1     1   No characters   2   Data Processing font  3   OCR A font   4   OCR B font    AC   Select Vertical Barcode    Selects Vertical Barcode and sets barcode parameters  Type  height  and size  parameters and options are the same as for Horizontal Barcode  Defaults are  the same as for horizontal  type   1  height   80  size   1      Command    C type   height   size NL    AD   Select Double Density Block Characters  Selects 120 dots per inch and sets Block Character parameters   Command    D height   width NL    Argument   height      width     Character Height   0 12 inches x height multiplier  or  Height Multiplier   Character Height 0 12     Line feed distance   Unit line x height multiplier    Unit line   unit line height set by    U control  sequence      Character width multiplier in the range 2 125   default   2   This also affects character cell width   For example    Character Width   0 08 inches x Width multiplier  or   Width Multiplier   Character Width 0 08   Character Cell Width   0 10 inches x Width  multiplier    or  Width multiplier   Character cell Width 0 10     125    Chapter    126    7    Control Sequences    AM   Select Normal Density Block Characters  Selects 60 dots per inch and sets Block Character parameters   Command  M height   width NL    Argument   height  Character Height Multiplier in even numbers in the  range 2 124  default   2     
115. anges  from 0 1 to 9 9 inches  0 25 to 25 2 cm      Example  The Graphics Pass     M0404000GRA  W02PHIC   prints     GRAPHIC    AM Horizontal orientation of characters    04 Window height of 0 4 inches  1 02 cm     04 Window width of 0 4 inches  1 02 cm     00 No justification down    0 No additional dot row justification down    GRA Data to be printed at 0 4 inches  1 02 cm  high   AW Indicates a change in character width    02 New character height of 0 2 inches  0 51 cm    PHIC Data to be printed at 0 2 inches  0 51 cm  high     Pass Density       This function changes the density  dots per inch or DPI  of barcodes and  block characters  The density of lines and boxes is not changed by this  command  The Pass Density command may be issued either inside or outside  a Graphics Pass and remains in effect until another Pass Density command  occurs or Graphics Mode is exited     The default printing density is 60x72 DPI  60 DPI horizontally by 72 DPI  vertically   The most common use of the     D command is to set the horizontal  density to 70 DPI to decrease barcode size  Pass density is inversely  proportional to size  higher density   smaller size   For example  a 2x  increase in density results in a 2x size reduction     Command   Dhhhvvv  Arguments  A D Pass Density Command    hhh The horizontal density in dots per inch  The  allowable range is from 040 to 240     Dot Slew    VV The vertical density in dots per inch  The allowable  is from 040 to 240     Example 1  The Grap
116. aracters    Data Field Characters       All of the barcodes presented in this chapter use the numeric characters 0 9   HEX 30 39   The only exceptions to this rule are the Code 39 Barcode and  the Code 128B Barcode  The Code 39 and Code 128B barcodes will also  print alpha characters and some symbols     None of the barcodes can use the SFCC as part of a data field     Code 39 Data Field Characters    The data field length for Code 39 Barcodes is variable  It is best to limit field  length to no more than 32 characters to minimize the potential for scanning  errors     Table 40 lists the available characters for Code 39 Barcodes     Table 40  Code 39 Character Set                                              Character HEX Value Character HEX Value Character HEX Value  Space 20 8 38 M 4D    24 9 39 N 4E    25 A 41 O AE    2B B 42 P 50    2D C 43 Q 51  2D D 44 R 52    2F E 45 S 53  0 30 F 46 T 54  1 31 G 47   55  2 32 H 48 V 56  3 33 l 49 W 57  4 34 J 4A X 58  5 35 K 4B Y 59  6 36 L 4C Z 5A  7 37                         211    Chapter 10 PGL Barcodes  Used in CREATE Mode Only     Code 128B and 128C Data Field Characters    The data field length for 128B and 128C Barcodes is variable  It is best to limit  field length to no more than 32 characters to minimize the potential for  scanning errors     While Code 128C Barcodes will only print paired numeric values  you can  send unpaired numeric  alpha characters  and symbols to the printer at the  same time  The printer will shift f
117. arameter   Rot  U case Designates print rotation After this option is selected you have three  and whether the data will rotations to select from and you can opt for all  be printed in mixed or all characters to be upper case   upper case characters  Enter   CW    90 degrees clockwise rotation   CPI selections other than   CCW    90 degrees counterclockwise rotation   the default value of 10 CPI   INV    180 degrees rotation  upside down ouput    are not allowed in rotated  output  Ada   UC    upper case character output  All lower   Inserted desired rotation case alpha characters will be converted to upper   first  then designate case   upper case printing if  desired   D  Optional parameter for Enter D or DARK to select this option     Dark Printing       changing horizontal dot  densit from 60 DPI to 120  DPI           Parameters X1 and X2 define the starting point of printer output  Whether in dots or characters  depends on the SCALE command  You may also use the XX YY format for plotting start print          locations    X1  Specifies the starting row X1 has a valid range of 1 to the current form  of the printer output  length    X2  Specifies the starting X2 has a valid range from 1 to the current form       column of the printer  output        width        159       Chapter 9 PGL Commands    Table 9  Static Dynamic Alphanumeric Creation Command       Field Function Option Modifier Selections          Parameters X3 and X4 control character expansion  The valid range of 
118. at both ends of the printable data  The position of the  printable data delimiter in the command format and in any examples in this  manual will be indicated by a t     NOTE  Only characters that do not appear in the printable data field can be  used as delimiters     Spaces       Do not use spaces between the command parameters unless specifically  required     Command Parameters       The majority of the PGL commands have multiple command parameters   Some parameters are required and some are optional  There are several  selections you may enter for some of the required parameters  for example   SFCC   These parameters must be separated by a semicolon     Form And Logo Names       Names identifying forms or logos may be no longer than eight characters  The  document name is used in the EXECUTE Form Mode to identify the form or in  CREATE Form Mode to identify the logo to be used for printing     NOTE  Do not use spaces in the document name    The following characters may be used in document names   e Upper and lower case A Z  HEX 41 5A and 61 7A      Number 0 9  HEX 30 39    e Dollar Sign      HEX 24    e Percent Sign      HEX 25    e Dash      HEX 2D    e At Sign  O   HEX 40    e Braces      HEX 7B and 7D    e Parenthesis      HEX 28 and 29    e Tilde      HEX 7E    e Single Quotes           HEX 60 and 27    e Exclamation Point      HEX 21    e Pound Sign      HEX 23     152    Numeric Variables    e Amersand   amp    HEX 26   The SFCC can also be used as part of a form or
119. atic Increment  94    Barcode and LCP Printing  225  barcode printing  230  data formats of barcode types  235  Secured mode  228  special features  227  Unsecured mode  228    Barcode Command Parameters  PGL  Barcodes  205  Barcode Data  Incrementing  214  Barcode Header  Barcode Printing  230  Barcode Printing  230  barcode header  230  Barcode Rotations in PGL  Line Printer  Graphics  315  Barcode Types  Data Formats  235  Barcodes  61  Code 128  72  Code 128 Special Characters  75  Code 39  130  Code 39 Type 1 Examples  132  Code 39 Type 2 Examples  133  dark bar ratios  70  density  62  EAN 13  139  EAN 8  140  emulation limitations  130  height  62  high density  71  Interleaved Two of Five  135  137  light bar ratios  70  LOGMARS  72  PGL  205  Postnet  79  selecting  62  Two of Five with Ratio  134  136  UPC Version A  138  Version 1  63  Version 2  64  width  62  Barcodes  Industrial Graphics Application  121  130    319    Block Character  control panel option  27  Block Character Fonts  37  10 CPI  38  12 CPI  39  15 CPI  39  7 5 CPI  37  Block Character Sizes  141  Block Character  character printing  27  Block Character  control panel option  46  Block Characters  block character sizes  141  double density   D  examples  143  mixing barcode block characters  144  Normal Density   M  Examples  141  size variations  142  Block Characters  Industrial Graphics  Application  121  141  Block Mode  Industrial Graphics Application  122  Block Character Size Tables  301  
120. ber  system digit is used with the twelth digit to define characters  representing a specific country code        If twelve digits are sent  the number system digit will  automatically be zero  0   If thirteen digits are sent  the first digit  will be used as the number system digit  If more than thirteen or  less than twelve digits  or any invalid characters are sent  the  number system digit and the invalid characters are encoded as a  solid black character     Examples     Horizontal with Data Processing Font Characters   4B 13 80 1 2 lt CRLF gt  509876543210 lt CRLF gt  prints     S   UI    Vertical without Data Processing Font Characters     C13 80 1 lt CRLF gt   509876543210 lt CRLF gt  prints     IN    139    Chapter 7 Barcodes    EAN 8  Type 1        Character Set0 123456789    Data Limits Eight digits  The EAN 8 symbol encodes two flag digits  five data  digits  and the check digit  eight total digits including the check  digit  The check digit is calculated by the printer  If more or less  than seven digits are sent  the sequence is printed as text rather  than as Barcode  Invalid characters are encoded as a solid black  character     Examples     Horizontal with Data Processing Font Characters    B14 80 1 2 lt CRLF gt  654321 lt CRLF gt  prints     A      Vertical without Data Processing Font Characters    C14 80 1 lt CRLF gt  6543210 lt CRLF gt  prints     DX    140    Block Character Sizes    Block Characters       Block characters use the same basic formatting a
121. can be extended with the following user specific  additional barcodes  see    Add On Barcodes    on page 257      e Add On 2 barcode  e Add On 5 barcode    Here the check number  c  is transferred before the barcode information  n      EAN 13    12 numbers are transferred for the EAN 13 code  The 13  digit represents the  check number  The even figures of the information have a factor of  3   the  uneven figures a factor of  1   Counting begins from the left and the resulting  cross sum is divided by 10  The remaining figure is subtracted from the modul   10   If the remainder is  0   the check number is also  0      Example  Information 4 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1  Factor 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3 1 3  Product 4 0 1 6 3 412  5   18  7  24  9  0  Cross sum 89    10  modul    9  remainder    1  check number                      For remainder    0    the check number is also    0        EAN 8    Seven numbers are transferred for the EAN 8 code  The 8  digit represents  the check number  The even figures of the information have a factor of  3   the  uneven figures a factor of  1   Counting begins from the left and the resulting  cross sum is divided by 10  The remaining figure is subtracted from the modul   10   If the remainder is  0   the check number is also  0      Example  Information 4 0 1 2 3 4 6 2  Factor 3 1 3 1 3 1 3  Product 12  0  3  2   9   4  18  Cross sum 48    10  modul    8  remainder    2  check number        For remainder    0    the check number is also    0        2
122. ch  barcode block character ranges from 01 to 99  0 1 to 9 9 inches  or 0 3 to 25 2 cm   For example  a value of 03 means a height of  0 3 inches  0 76 cm      The width of each printed barcode block character  This  dimension is measured horizontally on the page and is specified  in increments of 0 1 inches  0 25cm   The width for each barcode   block character ranges from 01 to 99  0 1 to 9 9 inches or 0 3 to  25 2 cm  For example  a value of 10 means a width of 1 0 inches   2 5 cm      Data can be positioned down the page from the beginning of the  Pass  This is teemed justification  the jj is the amount of  justification from 00 to 99 increments of 0 1 inches  0 3 to 25 2  cm   The d allows an additional amount of justification down from  0 to 9 dot rows to fine tune the final position of the data  For  example  inserting the value 118 means the data is moved down  1 1 inches  2 8 cm  plus an additional 8 dot rows  A justification  value of 000 sets the current print position to the top of the  current Graphics Pass     NOTE  Any values not specified will default to 0      lt data gt     24    The actual data can be printed  Characters in the data string will  be printed as block characters or in a particular GPL font   Barcodes  lines  boxes  and formatting commands may also be  placed in the pass  The data contained within the pass is printed  in accordance with the orientation  height  width  and justifcation  values of the Graphics Pass     Every Graphics Pass is term
123. cs  Line Printer  311    H    Half Space Font Mode  45  Half Dot Mode  Double Density   36  Half Dot Mode and Half Tones  36  Half Dot Mode  Double Density   character  printing  36  Half Dot Mode and Half Tones  36  Half Tone Reverse Image  35  Half Tone Toggle  35  Half Tone  character printing  34  Half Tone  toggle  35  Height  barcode  62  Height  Postnet Barcodes  79  Hex Command  45  HIBCC Barcode  81  High Density Barcode  71  High Quality Font Mode  44  Home and Cursor  Industrial Graphics  Application  121  129  Home and Cursor  paper motion commands  129  Horizontal Line Commands  PGL Commands  194  Horizontal Repeat  Repeating Data Version 1  98  Horizontal Tab  Positioning Data  83    Ignore Commands  PGL Commands  196  Ignore Data  21   Pass Format  23  Incremented Static Alphanumeric Strings  161  Incrementing Barcode Data  PGL Barcodes  214  Industrial Graphics Application  121   barcodes  121  130   block characters  121  141   block mode  122   command summary  121   command summary table  145   control sequence formatting  123   control sequences  121  122   entering barcode  122   exiting barcode block character mode  123   home and cursor  121  129   invalid commands  122   valid control sequences  124    323    Interleaved 2 5  PGL Barcode Commands  220  Interleaved Two of Five  135   Interleaved Two of Five  Barcode  137  Interrupt Function  Positioning Data  88   Invalid Commands  Industrial Graphics  Application  122   ISET Commands in PGL  316   ISO 
124. cter Set0 123456789    Data Limits Any even number of digits  If an odd number of digits or invalid  characters are sent  they will be encoded as a solid black  character     Examples     Horizontal with OCR A characters     B11 80 1 3 lt CRLF gt  012345678 lt CRLF gt   prints        0123456799    Vertical without OCR characters     C11 80 1 lt CRLF gt  0123456789 lt CRLF gt   prints     137    Chapter 7 Barcodes    UPC Version A  Type 12     Character Set0 123456789    Data Limits Data is limited to 10 digits  Each symbol as exactly 10 data digits  preceeded by a number system digit followed by a check digit  If  10 characters are sent  the printer supplies zero as the number  system check  If 11 digits are sent  the first digit is used as the  number system digit  The printer calculates and encodes the  check digit  If more than 11 or less than 10 digits or any invalid  characters are sent  the number system digit and the invalid  characters are encoded as a solid black character        Examples     Horizontal with Data Processing Font   AB12 80 1 2 lt CRLF gt  9876543210 lt CRLF gt  prints    H DU    Vertical without Data Processing Font   AC12 80 1 lt CRLF gt  9876543210 lt CRLF gt  prints     II     138    EAN 13  Type 13     EAN 13  Type 13     Character Set0 123456789    Data Limits Twelve digits  An EAN 13 symbol is very similar to UPC Version  A  but has a thirteenth digit  a number system digit  which is  encoded into a parity pattern of the left six digits  The num
125. ctions    DELETE Command Specifier Enter the current Special Function Control  FORM  Character  followed by DELETE FORM   then end the entry with the parameter  delimiter   NAME Parameter that specifies desired Enter the name of a specific form you want  Form to delete  to delete or  ALL to delete all forms   Delete Logo Command  Normal   This command is used in NORMAL Mode to delete a stored logo from  memory   DELETE LOGO   Table 26  Delete Logo Command  Field Function Option Modifier Selections    DELETE Command Specifier Enter the current Special Function Control  LOGO  Character  followed by DELETE LOGO   then end the entry with the parameter  delimiter   NAME Parameter that specifies desired Enter the name of a specific form you want       Logo to delete        to delete or  ALL to delete all logos        191          Chapter 9    PGL Commands    Density Command  Normal and Execute        This command selects a Characters Per Inch for print output      DENSITY    n      Table 27  Density  CPI  Command       Field    Function    Option Modifier Selections         DENSITY     Command Specifier    Enter the current Special Function Control  Character  followed by DENSITY  then end  the entry with the parameter delimiter        192       Parameter that specifies desired    CPI setting        Valid selections are 10  12  13  15  17   10A to select 10 CPI OCR A and 10B to  select 10 CPI OCR B     Directory Command  Normal        This command is used in NORMAL Mode to print a 
126. d  the gap is closed     When Descender Mode is toggled off  all lower case characters with  descenders are moved up so that the bottom of each descender rests on the  baseline  Lower case characters without descenders appear the same  whether Descender Mode is ON or OFF     NOTE  All Graphics Passes start in the default Non Descender Mode   Command  D  Example 1  M0202000j Dj Dy Dy   prints     Igy    32    Revese Image Descender Mode    Reverse Image       Reverse Image causes the printer to print white block characters on a black  background  The black background extends beyond each character one dot  row or column for every 0 1 inch increment of character window size  For  example  a Reverse Image character window with a horizontal dimension of  03  0 3 inches or 0 76 cm  and a vertical dimension of 04  0 4 inches or 1 0  cm  will have the dark background extend three dot columns left and right of  the character s  and four dot rows on the top and bottom     The Reverse Image Command is valid only if it is within a Graphics Pass  If it  is outside of a Graphics Pass  it is interpreted as a Repeat Command  If the  Graphics Pass is terminated while Reverse Image is ON  Reverse Image is  automatically terminated     Command    R lt data gt 4R    Arguments  AR Turns ON Reverse Image    lt data gt  Data to be printed in Reverse Image   AR Turns OFF Reverse Image     Example 1  Sending    M0202000 RGRAPHICS     prints        Example 2  Sending    M02020004ROPT4RION     prints  
127. d at 72 DPI     Enter a vlue from 1 252  followed by the  parameter delimiter  Do not enter an  amount larger than necessary to print the  Logo        HL    Horizontal size of the Grid at 60  DPI     Enter a vlue from 1 240  followed by the  parameter delimiter  Do not enter an  amount larger than necessary to print the  Logo           Row        Specifies which row in the Grid is  being defined for printing dots        Enter each row that will be printed on a  separate line  followed by the parameter  delimiter  rows in the Grid are numbered  sequentially from top to bottom of the Grid        188       Field    Create Logo Command  Normal     Table 24  CREATE LOGO Mode Command    Function Option Modifier Selections       Dot Pattern    Specifies dot s  that will be printed   This information is entered in two ways    in the specified row  single dots or sequences of dots  Several  single or sequences of dots can be defined  for each row  Proper format for entering  sequences of dots is beginning dot    ending dot  23 44   Each of the entries  must be separated by a semicolon           END       Command Terminator  Enter END           Using the LOGO Command    This section illustrates the use of the LOGO Command to create a logo for the  Job Application Form we created earlier for a demolition company  Since this  is a demoltion company  we will create the logo as a Bomb with the upper   case letter D superimposed on it  The dimensions of the grid will be    5 x  75 inches   
128. d the  parameter delimiter   ER  Plots the ending ROW of the Enter a range ranging from 2 to one less  corner  than the maximum form length and the  parameter delimiter   EC Plots the ending COLUMN of the Enter a value ranging from 2 to one less       corner        than the maximum form width           The VL and HL parameters specify the arm length of each corner piece in dots or characters  depending on the SCALE Command  You may also use the XX YY format        183       Chapter    9 PGL Commands    Table 22  Corner Command                Field Function Option Modifier Selections  VL  Specifies the length of the vertical Enter a value of 1 or greater  Do not forget  arms of each corner  the parameter delimiter   HL Specifies the length of the Enter a value of 1 or greater   horizontal arms of each corner   STOP Command Terminator  Enter STOP and the printer waits for a new    184          command  Leave STOP out and the  printer will wait for another CORNER  Command        Using The Corner Command    Using The Corner Command       The corner command is used and set up similar to the BOX Command  with a  few additional parametres  Use the same basic program for this parameter  and add two specifications for controlling arm lengths  Create a set of corner  frames on our form with the same starting and ending points  SCALE   DOT   used in the BOX program presented previously  and add arm lengths of 30  dots  The finished program would be      RESET    CREATE   CORNER   SCALE 
129. dashed line  exactly 2 0 inches 95 08 cm  long and 0 10 inches tall     ALD Dashed Line command  0200 Specifies a horizontal dimension of 2 0 inches   0010 Specifies a vertical dimension of 0 10 inch     51    Chapter 3 Line Drawing    Example 2  The command  LD00100210   prints a vertical dashed line  0 10 inch wide and 2 1 inches  5 3 cm  tall     a   GC   E   E   E       E   E   SW   E      ALD Dashed Line command  0010 Specifies a horizontal dimension of 0 1 inches   0210 Specifies a vertical dimension of 2 1 inches     Example 3  Dashed lines will print horizontally if the horizontal and vertical  dimensions are the same  The command    LD01000100 will print  a series of vertical stripes 0 1 inches  0 25 cm  wide across a  space that is 1 0 inches  2 5 cm  square     ALD Dashed Line command  0100 Horizontal dimension of 1 0 inches   0100 Vertical dimension of 1 0 inches     52    Boxes    Dashed Lines       Description    Boxes can be drawn in a variety of shapes  sizes  and line  weights  Maximum box size is limited to the maximum printed  pass length and the width of the paper being printed upon     NOTE  When printing boxes  the minimum box length must be greater than  twice the thickness of the vertical borders     The minimum box height must be greater than twice the thickness of    the  Command  Arguments    ALB  hhh    VVV    Example 1     horizontal borders   The command for drawing a box is   ALBhhhdvvvdhv    The Box command     Horizontal length of the box in i
130. data and instructions to be  processed and printed  starting at the current paper position  before accepting  any further data from the host     Each pass begins at the current vertical paper postion and the left margin   From this point  the printer prints to the right and down the page     NOTE  Itis not possible to print above the starting point of a Graphics Pass   It is possible  however  to issue positioning commands within the  pass which position the paper at any point below the start of the pass     NOTE  When  LF  FF     4   are used to terminate a Graphics Pass  they  lose their normal meanings  and become Pass Terminators such as  A   When used outside the Graphics Pass they take on their normal  meaning     21    Chapter    22    1    Graphics Pass    Not all GPL commands and data sent to the printer need to be ina  pass  In fact  many commands must be outside of a pass to function  properly  For instance  the command  H sets the form length if it is  used outside of a pass  but sets the pass height if it is used within a  Pass     At this point  it may seem difficult to decide when to use a Graphics  Pass  If there is any doubt about whether a command should go  inside or outside of a pass  refer to Appdendix F     Command Table     on page 287  The GPL commands fall into two general categories     Inside A Pass    e GPL positioning commands  e g   tabs  vertical justification  etc    e GPL printing commands  e g   barcodes  lines  boxes  certain fonts  etc    e
131. de nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 14    dec  20 Start code nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 20    Example   10 REM code UPC A with HRI  20 LPRINT CHR  27  30 LPRINT CHR  26  40 LPRINT CHR  20  50 LPRINT CHR  27    210                     21 1      3  N3 111  CHR  25    3  012345 678901    CHR  20      0     12345   67890 Jl    247    Chapter    11 Data Formats of Barcode Types                                  Code UPC A Without HRI  Syntax  Figures  n  smear Start Code oa Stop Code  ASCII  0  to  9  Calculation K   Kg nie    gt  See    Check  hex  30 to 39 Number 3A 3A 3A  dec  48 to 57 Calculation    58 58 58  on page 258        248    Data Structure  ASCII DC4 Start code nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code DC4    hex  14 Start code nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 14    dec  20 Start code nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 20    Example    10 REM code UPC A without HRI    20 LPRINT CHR  27                   11211    30 LPRINT CHR  26    03 111   CHR  25    40 LPRINT CHR  20   50 LPRINT CHR  27     210      ARA       012345 678901    CHR  20         Code UPC E With HRI                                  Code UPC E With HRI  Syntax  A Check  Figures  n  Number  c  Start Code Stop Code  ASCII  0  to  9  Calculation ae SE  see    Check   hex  30 to 39 Number 3A 3A  dec  48 to 57 Calculation    58 58   on page 258   Data Structure  ASCII DC4 Start code nnnnnnnc Stop code DC4  hex  14 Start code nnnnnnnc Stop code 14  dec  20 Start code nnnnnnnc Stop
132. defined forms stored in memory  The  command syntax is     Command    IFORM R    Buffered Form List    Buffered Form List       This command prints a list of all forms currently in memory  the number of  bytes needed for each form  the total number of bytes used  and the number  of bytes still available  This is done through the command     Command AIFORM L  Example  Issuing the above command prints              FORM_LIST  TEST 1  EXAMPLE 1  AIAG F  MT  AIAG  METALS_F  MT  EXAMPLE 1    BYTES USED  BYTES AVAILABLE         105    Chapter    106    6    Buffered Forms    Buffered Form Repeats       Two types of Repeat commands are allowed within a buffered form  the  Buffered Form Copy command and the Buffered Form Repeat command   Both the Copy and Repeat commands serve to repeat a sequence of Create   lt data gt  a certain number of times  The difference between them is that the  number of times a Copy command repeats data is determined in the Create  command sequence  where as the number of times the Repeat command  repeats data is determined in the Execute command sequence     Buffered Form Copy       The Buffered Form Copy command is used to repeat a sequence of  commands and data within a buffered form Create  lt data gt  sequence  The  command for this is     Command    Cnn  lt data gt  Z      Arguments  AC Copy Command  nn The number of times the data is to be repeated   01   99     lt data gt  The data to be repeated   AZA  End of Copy Terminator    Enough data must be 
133. directory of all defined  forms and logos  logo assignments to forms  available memory  and how  memory is currently used for form and logo storage     To print the directory  enter the current Special Function Control Character     SFCC  followed by DIRECTORY        Expanded Print Command  Normal and Execute     Expanded Print Command  Normal and Execute        This command allows you to expand alphanumeric characters horizontally  and vertically        EXPAND    VE    HE      Table 28  Expanded Print Command                Field Function Option Modifier Selections    EXPAND    Command Specifier  Instructs Enter the current Special Function Control   printer to enter Expanded Print Character  followed by EXPAND  then end  mode  the entry with the parameter delimiter    VE  Vertical expansion amount  Enter a value specifying the desired  expansion factor  then end the entry with  the parameter delimiter  Valid selections  range from 0 113  A selection of 0 returns  you to standard size characters    HE Horizontal expansion amount  Enter a value specifying the desired       expansion factor  then end the entry with  the parameter delimiter  Valid selections  range from 0 113  A selection of 0 returns  you to standard size characters        193       Chapter    9    PGL Commands    Horizontal And Vertical Line Commands  Create        In addition to boxes and corners  you can print horizontal and vertical lines on  your forms  The following commands control location  length  and
134. e     Thickness of second vertical line is 1 dot column     Third vertical line is positioned 1 0 inches from the  second vertical line     No additional dot columns added to position of third  vertical line     Thickness of third vertical line is 3 dot columns     Command Terminator    Plot Mode    Dashed Lines       Description Plot Mode allows you to create and print your own graphics  images  The Plot Mode command must be inside a Graphics  Pass     Plot data is based on vertical columns of seven dots each  Each  column is described by a hex byte that specifies which of the  seven dots to print  The Least Significant Bit  LSB  of the byte is  mapped to the bottom of the column  while the eighth bit is  ignored  See Table 2     Table 2  Least Significant Bit                         Hex Value Bit Dot   80 7 Not used  40 6 1  top   20 5 2   10 4 3   08 3 4   04 2 5   02 1 6   01 0 7  bottom                 Command    Q lt plot data gt    G    Arguments   Q Enters Plot Mode   lt plot data gt  The hex plot data    G Exits Plot Mode    Example 1  This example prints an X  The command sequence is  AMAQ41      22 14 08 14 22 414G     NOTE  Commas are not required between the data and do not affect the  results  Pass terminators placed between two plot commands will  cause one extra blank dot row to be plotted between the plot images   To eliminate the blank row  keep subsequent plot commands within  the same pass  To eliminate the blank row  keep subsequent plot  commands within 
135. e commands  196  Incremented Static Alphanumeric Strings  161  normal command  197  page number command  170  PGL mode control  197  presentation  157  reset command  198  reverse print command  171  scale command  199  select format command  200  STARDATA  162  STEPMASK  162  vertical line commands  194  PGL Graphic Parameters  149  darkbar parameter  149  SFCC parameter  150  smooth parameter  149  Vscale parameter  150  zero parameter  150  PGL Menu Operations  147  graphic menu category  148  graphic parameters  149  menu parameters  147  PGL Menu Parameters  147  PGL Mode Control  PAL Commands  197  PGL Modes  Special Function Control  Character  155  PGL Special Function Command Character  parameter  Graphic Category  295  Pixel Expansion  graphics  59  Plot Mode  57  PN Then Parameter  Graphic Category  294  Positioning Data  83  dot slew  87  form length  87  horizontal tab  83  interrupt function  88    325    pass height  85   pass width  86   vertical justification  84  Postal Barcodes   PDF417 in Code V  312   PDF417 in PGL  313  Postal Barcodes  Line Printer Graphics  311  Postnet Barcodes  79   accessing POSTNET in CVCC  79   AIAG barcodes  80   CPI  CPI  Postnet Barcodes  79   EMBARC  81   height  79   HIBCC  81   orientation  79   parameters in POSTNET  80  POSTNET in CVCC  accessing  79  POSTNET  PGL Barcode Commands  222  Practice  PGL Command Set  201  Predefined Forms  109   AIAG forms  109   primary metals forms  111  Primary Metals Forms  111  Print Cycl
136. e the SFCC can be changed to any printable character and may be  different due to your host computer requirements we will use the   symbol to  represent the SFCC in all command sequences     Parameter Delimiter       Each parameter on the command line must be separated from other  parameters by a delimiter  The delimiter recognized by your printer is the  semicolon         NOTE  Do not place blank spaces between the delimiter and the next  parameter  A missing or misplaced delimiter causes an error     Case       The PGL language requires that all commands be entered in upper case  characters     Line Terminator       In PGL each command line must be terminated by a Line Feed  Carriage  Return with a Line Feed  or a Form Feed command  If you do not terminate  the command line properly  the command will not be accepted by your printer   Refer to your system documentation to determine how to perform a terminator  function  Line Feed  Carriage Return with Line Feed  or a Form Feed  command      151    Chapter 9 PGL Command Set Standards    Printable Data Delimiter       All printable data  excluding overlay data   alphanumeric characters  and  barcode data must be enclosed by a printable data delimiter  This delimiter is  always a printable character that the printer recognizes  telling it to print the  data that follows until it encounters the same character again  Any printable  character may be used except the SFCC or the slash      The same printable  character must be used 
137. eate a fixed incremental alphanumeric string use the following basic  command             STARTDATA     This command is identical to the Static Dynamic Alphanumeric string  command except for the following added parameters     Table 10  Fixed Incremental Alphanumeric String Command                            Field Function Option Modifier Selections   l  Specifies that this Enter l   command is an  incremental alphanumeric  command    idir  Optional field specifying Enter a    or leave this field blank to increment in  whether the data field will   a positive direction  Enter a    to decrement the  be incremented or data   decremented    STEPMASK    This parameter is the See the explanation following this table for how  increment information field   to construct the increment information field   that defines the number of  character positions in the  data field  the increment  amount for each position   and which positions will be  incremented    RPTn  Optional parameter that Enter RPT followed by a numeric value from 1 to  specifies the number of 65 535  The default repeat amount is 1  which  times a field value is means that if you do not enter this parameter or  repeated before it is enter only 1  then the field will be incremented  incremented  each time it prints    RSTn  Optional parameter that Enter RST followed by a numeric value from 1 to       specifies the number of  times an incremented field  will print before it is reset  to the starting point        65 535  The
138. ed into two lines  When this  happens the wrapped section of a command line is indented on the second  line as shown below         STEPMASK     Figure 4  Table Key    157    Chapter    9    PGL Commands    Alphanumeric String Creation Commands  Create        The command table in Figure 5 lists  describes  and explains the use of all  parameters that may be used in creating alphanumeric character strings  and  specifies their location on the form you are creating  You may creat static   dynamic  incremental  and dynamic incremental alphanumeric strings using  variations of this command  Table 9 shows the results of Incremental  Alphanumeric String Commands     In Dynamic Alphanumeric Creation a window is created on the form in which a  Dynamic Alphanumeric String will later be entered in the EXECUTE mode   The window is assigned a number  AFn  that will be used in EXECUTE mode  to identify in which window the string will print     The Static Dynamic Alphanumeric Create command is        Figure 5  Static Dynamic Alphanumeric Create in Table Format    Table 9  Static Dynamic Alphanumeric Creation Command                      Field Function Option Modifier Selections  ALPHA Specifies Alphanumeric Enter ALPHA   Data String creation  command   Reverse  Optional parameter used Enter    Printing  to enable reverse printing    R    for reverse printing only   RD    for reverse dense background  RDL    for reverse dense long background  RL    for reverse long background  L   long backg
139. ed subfields  Default RPT  1   and RST  999     ALPHA Printer Output  1 1 1 0 0 00LL1 RST9994000014 00001  SM   OOLL1 RPT  1 00002  SD   00001 RST   999 00003  00009  01000  99009  00001    In example 3 above  if the subfield was O000A  alphabetic   the subfield to the  left of the nonincremental linking subfield would increment alphabetically     0000A  0000B  0000C    0000Z  OAOOA    ZZ00Z  00000A    Example 4  Single STARTDATA position  Default RPT  1  and RST  0     ALPHA   Printer Output  1 1 1 0 0 00001   14 a  1  SM   00001 RPT 1 se  SD 1 RST 0     3  Notice that the printer a  automatically inserts the proper     9  number of spaces     to make the    10  STARTDATA field equal in size  to the STEPMASK  ae  99999  00000    164    STARTDATA  incremented Field     Example 5  Non incremental subfield with incremented linked subfields   Default RPT  1  and RST  5000     ALPHA Printer Output  1 1 1 0 0 XXX000L1   RST5000 ACME000 1  ACME000 1  SM   XXXO00L1 RPT  1 ACME000 2  SD   ACME000 1 RST   5000 ACME000 3    ACME000 9  ACME001 0    ACME499 9  ACMES00 0  ACME000 1    Example 6  Linked Alphanumeric subfields with a Decrementing subfield and  Non incrementing subfield  Default RPT  2  and RST  0     ALPHA Printer Output  1 1 1 0 0 XXX01 RPT2 TOPO9O  TOP99  SM     XXX01 RPT 2 TOP99  SD   TOP99 RST 0 TOP98  TOP98  TOP97  TOP97    TOPSS  TOPSS    TOPS4  TOPS4    TOP  TOPO2  TOPOL    TOP99    165    Chapter    9    PGL Commands    Dynamic Incremented Alphanumeric Strings      
140. egion   The barcode is not printed in the embedded  portion  This method of barcode printing is usually  done only for UPC and EAN barcodes     B  prints human readable characters below the  barcode     Barcode Version 2     lt data gt  The alphanumeric characters to be encoded   AG Command Terminator    Table 3 shows the available barcode styles and associated indices     Table 3  Valide Barcode Symbologies                                                                WEE   Kate S Description Check Digits Ratio       AIAG Code 39 None 1 1 3 3  W  s EMBARC Code 39 None 1 1 3 3      HIBCC Code 39 Mod 43 1 1 3 3  A C39 Code 39 None 1 1 3 3      LOGMAR Code 39 None 1 1 3 3  B C39A Code 39 None 1 2 4 5  C C39M43 Code 39 Mod 43 1 1 3 3  D CBAR Codabar None 1 2 3 4 1 1 1 1  E     Identicon 2 5 None 1 2 3 2  F MSI MSI None 1 1 2 2  G MSI 10 MSI Mod 10 1 1 2 2  H MSI1010 MSI Mod 10 10 1 1 2 2  K INT2 5 Interleaved 2 5 None 1 1 3 3  L INT2 5A Interleaved 2 5 None 1 2 4 5  P UPCA UPCA 11 digit Mod 10 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4  Q UPCE UPCE 10 digit Mod 10 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4  R UPCEO UPCEO 6 digit Mod 10 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4  S UPCE1 UPCE1 6 digit Mod 10 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4  T EAN13 EAN 13 digit Mod 10 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4  U EAN8 Ean 8 digit Mod 10 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4  Z C128 Code 128 Pseudo 103 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4                     These ratio numbers are to be read in pairs  They refer to the relative ratios  of the widths of the bars and gaps in barcode characters and correspond to  narrow bar narrow gap  wide bar 
141. elds       The printer allows you to store the basic format for an entire form and then  later send only the data that changes from one form to another  The postion in  each form where this data is inserted is called a data field  A field data  accomplishes two purposes     1  It specifies the number of data bytes     2  By its physical location in the buffered form  the data field specifies where  its bytes should be placed  A data field is identified by     nnn     N Identifies the beginning of the data field     nnn The number of bytes in each field  This ranges from 001 to 999   One byte of data represents a single character  such as 6 or r  the  actual number of bytes inserted into each field may be less than  the specified maximum  but how the unused spaces are treated  depends upon which control code is used as input to the buffered  data field     99    Chapter    100    6    Buffered Forms    Buffered Form Create       Buffered forms are created by the Buffered From Create Command  When a  buffered form is created  it is stored in printer memory until it is deleted or the  printer exits Graphics Mode  Every Version 2 Buffered Form has a name by  which it is referenced  The name is assigned to the Form by the Create  Command  and the form is referenced by name by the Buffered Form Execute  Command  The Execute Command is then used to print the form created by  the Create command     The Buffered Form Create command has the following syntax   Command    IFORM C lt form
142. ent the  data        175       Chapter 9    PGL Commands    Table 17  EXECUTE Form Command Optional Parameters                   Field Function Option Modifier Selections  STEPMASK  This parameter is the increment See the previous explanation on  information field that defines the Incremented Static Alphanumeric Strings  number of character positions in for how to construct the STEPMASK  the data field  the increment parameter   amount for each position  and  which positions will be  incremented   RPTn  Optional parameter that specifies Enter RPT followed by a numeric value  the number of times this field value   from 1 to 65 535  then the parameter  is repeated before it is delimiter  The default repeat amount is 1   incremented  which means that if you do not enter this  parameter or enter only 1  then the field  will be incremented each time it prints   RSTn  Optional parameter that specifies Enter RST followed by a numeric value  the number of times this from 1 to 65 535  then the parameter  incremented field will print before it   delimiter  The default reset value is 0   is reset to the starting point  which means that the field will not be  reset    This parameter defines the starting   Enter the delimiter followed by the barcode  tSTARTDATAt incremental bar code field  data string and end the entry with the data    delimiter  See the previous explanation on  Incremented Static Alphanumeric Strings   for how to construct the starting field  Also  see the information on
143. ental Dynamic Alphanumeric Data fields  have been defined  You may enter as many of the following fields as were originally defined on the    form           0   AFn        Optional parameter that specifies  one of the previously defined  Incremental Dynamic  Alphanumeric Data fields        Enter the Special Function Control  Character followed by IAF  then by the  assigned number of the desired  Incremental Alphanumeric Data Field  End  the entry with the parameter delimiter        174       EXECUTE Mode  Normal     Table 17  EXECUTE Form Command Optional Parameters                   Field Function Option Modifier Selections   idir  Optional field specifying whether Enter a plus sign    or leave this field blank  the data field will be incremented or   to increment in a positive direction   decremented  Enter a minus sign    to decrement the   data    STEPMASK    This parameter is the increment See the previous explanation on  information field that defines the Incremented Static Alphanumeric Strings  number of character positions in for how to construct the STEPMASK  the data field  the increment parameter   amount for each position  and  which positions will be  incremented    RPTn  Optional parameter that specifies Enter RPT followed by a numeric value  the number of times this field value   from 1 to 65 535  then the parameter  is repeated before it is delimiter  The default repeat amount is 1   incremented  which means that if you do not enter this   parameter or enter o
144. er case letters may be represented  by a         followed by the corresponding letter     Table 6  Code 39 Character Print Equivalents  ASCII Code 39                            NUL  U  space   space    YN  W  SOH  A    A A A a  A  STX  B     B B B b  B  ETX  C   IC C C c  C  EOT  D     D D d  D  ENQ  E     E E e  E  ACK  F  amp   F F F f  F  BEL  G IG G G g  G  BS  H    H H H h  H  HT     A   I  l                130       Emulation Limitations    Table 6  Code 39 Character Print Equivalents  ASCII Code 39                                                       NUL  U  space   space  e  V  W  LF  J    J J J j  J  VT  K     K K k  K  FF  L    L L L l  L  CR  M     M M m  M  SO  N N N n  N  SI  O     O O o  O   DLE  P 0 0 P P p  P   DC1  Q 1 1 Q Q q  Q   DC2  R 2 2 R R r  R   DC3  3 3 3 S S s  S   DC4  T 4 4 T T t  T   NAK  U 5 5 U U u  U   SYN  V 6 6 V V v  V   ETB  w 7 7 W W Ww  W   CAN  X 8 8 Xx X x  X  EM  Y 9 9 Y Y y  Y   SUB  Z IZ Z Z Z  Z   ESC  A F  F    K    P  FS  B  lt   G    L    Q  GS  C    H    M    R  RS  D  gt   l A  N    S  US  E d  J    O DEL  T       131    Chapter 7 Barcodes    Code 39 Type 1 Examples       Horizontal with OCR A characters     B1 80 1 3  lt CRFL gt  12345 67   890 lt CRLF gt  prints     Vertical without OCR characters     C1 80 1 lt CRLF gt 12345 67 890 lt CRLF gt   prints        312345   47 8390    132    Code 39 Type 2 Examples    Code 39 Type 2 Examples    Horizontal with OCR A characters     B2 80 1 3 lt CRLF gt  12345 67 890 lt CRLF gt    
145. erminates  barcode mode will neither be printed nor carried out  A tab command   hex 09  dec 9  is carried out in this barcode    10 REM US postnet barcode   20 LPRINT CHRS 27     211      30 LPRINT CHRS 27    1 p   1234567  CHRS   13     40 LPRINT CHR  27     210         262    Large Character Printing  LCP     Large Character Printing  LCP        Before you can transfer the LCP data  Large Character Printing  data to the  printer  the LCP header must be sent  The LCP header is made up of a series  of max  five characters  In the header  the printing parameters and the LCP  character size are defined  This header only needs to be transferred once   unless settings are to be changed or the printer has been turned off     LCP Header  Format  DLE     n EM      optional  does not need to be transmitted    Character meaning     DLE    hex 10  dec 16  start character     ASCII bidirectional printing  if transferred   n ASCII n  2     99  enlargement factor   EM  hex 19  dec 25  end character    with the help of the header  the enlargement factor is fixed to the original size   A character in LCP mode with the size n occupies a horizontal space for n  normal character  depending on the selected character distance  At a  character distance of 10 characters inch and an enlargement factor of 6  the  LCP font width is 6 10 inch     The height of a LCP character is n times 1 12 inch  It is independent of the  selected line spacing  The LCP characters are printed  so that their lower  ed
146. es  Industrial Graphics Application  122  Print Position Location  Special Function Control  Character  153  Printable Data Delimiter  Special Function Control  Character  152  Printer Control Panel Graphics Directory  293  PY Then Parameter  Graphic Category  294  PY Then  Graphics Mode  17  PY PN Data Processing  297   when PN Then   ALL  298   when PN Then   NONE  297   when PY Then   ALL  300   when PY Then   NONE  299   when PY Then   TERM  300    Q    QMS Code V Graphics Processing Language  15    326    R    Repeat  Buffered Forms  108  Repeating Data  89  Repeating Data Version 1  98  horizontal repeat  98  vertical repeat  98  Repeating Data Version 2  89  horizontal repeat  Horizontal Repeat   Repeating Data Version 2  89  multiple repeat commands  92  vertical repeat  91  Reset Command  PGL Commands  198  Reverse Image  33  Reverse Image  character printing  33  Reverse Image  Half Tone  35  Reverse Print Command  PGL Commands  171    S    SCALE Command Modifications in PGL  Line  Printer Graphics  318  Scale Command  PGL Commands  199  Secured Mode  Barcode and LCP Printing  228  Select Format Command  PGL Commands  200  Selecting Barcodes  62  Selection  Control Panel  293  Sets  Character  305  SFCC Parameter  PGL Graphic Parameters  150  SFCC  PGL Command Set Standards  151  Size Variations  Block Characters  142  Smooth Parameter  PGL Graphic Parameters  149  Solid Lines  line drawing  49  Spaces  Special Function Control Character  152  Special Features  Barc
147. ess it is used within a  Copy Command  Refer to    Buffered Form Copy    on page 106     101    Chapter 6 Buffered Forms    The following examples illustrate the use of buffered formatting     Example 1  This example is a two step process  A form with the file name  EXAMPLE 1 will be created in the first step  then executed in the  second step     1  Tocreate the buffered form  send the command   AIFORM EEXAMPLE 14G123456789014 4G    This creates the basic label and specifies the size and position of the data  field and how many bytes  characters  the data field will hold     2  Call the form and send the data for the data field with the command   AIFORM  EEXAMPLE14G123456789014 4G    AFORM EEXAMPLE 14G  Gets the buffered form EXAMPLE1     123456789011   The data being inserted into form EXAMPLE 1   AG Marks the end of the data  Data Terminator      The data 12345678901 is inserted into the three byte wide data field in  the buffered form  3 bytes at a time  The first line prints    Always 3 bytes   123    then there is a CRLF  followed by    Always 3 bytes  456    and another  CRLF  and so forth until all the data in the Execute Command has been  used  The printed result of these Buffered Form commands is     Always 3 bytest123  Always 3 butes 436  AlwaYs A bytes  789  Always 3 bytes  gl    Example 2  The buffered form is a more complex design  It is a sequence of  Code V commands that can be used to print an AIAG form     1  The following commands create an AIAG buffered fo
148. fault setting is 1 2     Rn Specifies the number of rows in the barcode  The valid range  for n is 3 90   Cn Specifies the number of data columns in the barcode  The valid    range for n is 1 90     Sn Specifies the security level  which determines the number of  error correction codewords contained in the barcode  The valid  range for n is 0 9     Since many of the formatting commands for PDF417 barcodes conflict with  each other  most of them cannot be used in conjunction with each other   Table 48 on page 314 shows commands that cannot be used together     313    Appendix L Code 128A Barcodes in PGL    Table 48  Commands That Cannot Be Used Together                      Xx Y H W ASPECT R Cc X  x A  Y S  H   X X  W X   X  ASPECT X X   X  R X X   X  C X X A    S z                                     Code 128A Barcodes in PGL       The PGL graphics emulation now supports selection of Code 128A barcodes  from within a bar code command  Enter C128A as the barcode name     Codabar Codes in PGL       The PGL graphics emulation now supports selection of Codabar barcodes  from within a bar code command  Enter CODABAR as the bar codename     UCC EAN 128 Barcodes in PGL       The PGL graphics emulation now supports selection of UCC 128  EAN 128   barcodes from within a bar code command  Enter EAN128  UCC128  or  UCC 128 as the barcode name     UPC E0 Bar Codes in PGL       The PGL graphics emulation now supports selection of UPC EO barcodes  from within a barcode command  Enter UPC E
149. g a 1 from other columns when adding  or subtracting also apply  For example     oz 1B  Operand     1  2  Operator    1A oz  Answer    Below are two additional examples showing how this carry function operates   OT OA  Operand     17  27  Operator    2A 2H  Answer     The answer is always limited to the total number of characters and spaces in  the operand  even if the operator value has the full twelve characters allowed   For example     Y 2F 16A   Operand    112  105  1234  Operator   A 2A 39E  Answer     If spaces are included in the operand value  only numeric values can appear  in the answer for those same columns  No letters are permitted  For example      1 space  Y 2F  Operand    112  105  Operator   2A 2A  Answer     95    Chapter 5 Automatic Increment Decrement    Example 1  The Auto Increment Command   AIREPV 3 0  GAM0202000  YAA8 34G4     AIREPE prints     AY    AA8   3    AGA A     AIREPE    ABI  DA    Turns ON the Automatic Increment Decrement  function     The operand  the starting value      The operator  This is the amount by which the  operand is incremented     Completes the automatic incremental command  and performs a Carriage Return Line Feed     Turns OFF the automatic increment decrement  function     Example 2  The Auto Increment command   AIREPV 4 0GM0202000 Y Y9 44G       AIREPE  prints     AY     4    AGA A     AIREPE    96    af  Ye  me ess   K      ST  i  i    Turns ON the Automatic Increment Decrement  function  The space before Y9 means that t
150. g begins from the right  The resulting cross sum is divided by  10  The remaining integer value is subtracted from the modul  10   The result  is transmitted as the check number  c      Example  Information 3 8 6 1 0 4  Factor 3 9 3 9 3  Product 24  54  3   0   12  Cross sum 93    3  remainder    3  check number   The check number is not printed in the clear data line  HRI      Add On 2    Three numbers are transmitted  check number  c  and 2 informations  n    The check number results from the remaining integer value of modul  4      Example 1  Information 0 0 4  Remainder  0  L 0  Example 2  Information 2 0 6  Remainder  2  9  Example 3  Information 3 9 9  Remainder  3  3    261    Chapter 11 Data Formats of Barcode Types    Example 4  Information 1 0 9  Remainder  1  4    NOTE  The check number always lies between    0    and    3     it is not printed in  the HRI line     US Postnet Barcode       Data Structure    ASCII ESC Kb gl D SP  p   hex  1B Sp 31 20 70  dec  27 91 49 32 112  Description    After receiving this sequence numeric characters from 0  hex  30  to   9  hex  39  are interpreted as barcode figures  Other Alpha characters are  ignored  Control characters from hex 00  dec 9  to hex 1F  dec 31  terminates  this barcode mode     You may use this sequence in every emulation  The printer can print barcode  in NLQ and LQ  If draft print quality  DPQ  is selected the printout is  performed in NLQ     NOTE  The character  e g  CR   carriage return  hex  OD   which t
151. ge 65  with other values that are not exact multiples   The Version 2 Graphics Pass   AMO505000 IBARC UPCA R2 3 4 6 6 8 8 9 E 1234567890G      prints   AL WI UI ID  High Density Barcode       Normally  barcodes print at 60 DPI horizontally  For improved readability  they  may also print at 120 DPI  The 120 DPI  High Density Mode can be toggled  ON and OFF by the command     Command KF    Example  The command sequence  AM0505000   4KFAIBARC C39 B MAU THE CATAGAKF prints     UI  0N IEE NR AC O AU LO TTT TE TIET  MAU THE CAT    AKF first turns the High Density mode for barcodes ON  then the barcode is  printed  The second    KF turns High Density Mode OFF     NOTE  Darkbar Control Panel settings overrides    KF if Darkbar is ON     71    Chapter    72    4    LOGMARS Barcode       The LOGMARS barcode is a style used by the U S  government  Although it  was meant to print with the human readable characters placed below the  barcode  B   LOGMARS can also be used the with human readable  characters embedded in the barcode  E  or not selected  N      Example  The Graphics Pass   AM10104IFONTS S 104GAIBARC LOGMAR E NEWMEX4G4     prints     Code 128 Barcode       While many barcode styles are limited to numbers  Code 128 can encode  numbers  letters  and other symbols commonly found on keyboards  such as        and    The Code 128 barcode is similar to three barcodes in one  The  three barcode styles are called Code A  Code B  and Code C  Each barcode  style is designed to encode cert
152. ges lie flush with the next available ground line  The result is that only the  upper edges of characters with an uneven enlargement factor can lie flush  with the line     LCP Data    The existence of a LCP header does not mean that all subsequent characters  are printed in LCP size  The LCP mode must begin and end with the LCP  brackets SI  hex 0F  dec 15   All characters inside these brackets are printed  as LCP characters  The LCP mode is ended by all characters from hex 00 to  hex 1F     LCP characters can be printed with character densities 10  12  15  17 1 and  20 cpi  If there is a LCP line overflow  the printing procedure is automatically  started  All characters which caused the overflow are then printed as normal  characters     Refer to the section  Secured Unsecured Mode  at the front of the Manual for  detailed description of the secured unsecured mode     Data Structure    ASCII SI n  n SI  hex  OF n  n OF  dec  15 n  n 15    n   all printable characters   gt  hex 1F  dec 31     263    Chapter 11 Data Formats of Barcode Types    Example    REM Example Character Densities                                                          OPEN  1lpt1   FOR RANDOM AS  1   WIDTH  1  255   PRINT  1  CHR   27      11      PRINT  1  CHR  16    4   CHR   25    PRINT  1  CHR  27     6w    REM 15CPI  PRINT  1  CHR   15    LCP   CHR   15    PRINT  1  CHR  27     5w    REM 12CPI  PRINT  1  CHR   15    LCP   CHR   15    PRINT  1  CHR   27     4w    REM 10CPI  PRINT  1  CHR   15    LC
153. get the   parameter delimiter   CP An optional parameter that canbe   Selections that can be used are 10  12  13        used to specify Character Per Inch  setting for print output        15  and 17  No value will result in the  default setting of 10 LPI     199          Chapter    9    PGL Commands    Select Format  SF  Command   Normal  Create  and Execute        These commands allow you to configure PGL to ignore characters from 00 to  OF Hex  This enables the printer to ignore all host generated paper movement  commands        SFOFF   AND  e  sron      Table 37  Set Format Commands                         Field Function Option Modifier Selections   SFON    SFON Turns Select Format Mode on  The   Enter the current Special Function Control  printer ignores all characters from Character followed by SFON   00 to OF Hex until it receives the  SFOFF sequence    SFOFF    SFOFF Turns Select Format Mode off  The   Enter the current Special Function Control       printer begins processing normally    Character followed by SFOFF           200    When SF Mode is activated you may still send paper movement commands  by using one of the following commands     Enter Result   cr Carriage Return  OLF Line Feed  OFF Form Feed    These commands will have no effect after the SFOFF Command has been  sent        Practice    Select Format  SF  Command  Normal  Create  and Execute        Earlier in this chapter we presented some sample commands for creating  various graphical elements for a form
154. ght  value you may enter is ignored in favor of the correct value        CPI    The Postal Service requires POSTNET barcodes to be of specific resolution   as defined by dots per inch  DPI   POSTNET codes must be 105 DPI  horizontally and 72 DPI vertically  For the height value  the correct POSTNET  DPI values are automatically chosen  Any other DPI values you may enter in  a Graphics Pass command will have no effect on the POSTNET barcode   Other DPI values will however  effect characters other than POSTNET  barcodes        79    Chapter    80    4    Postnet Barcodes    Parameters In POSTNET       When used with POSTNET barcodes  some parameters function differently  than when used with other barcodes  These parameters are as follows     AIBARC POSTNET B 98032      The Below  B  parameter adds human readable characters below the  barcode  but unlike other barcodes  does not reduce the height of POSTNET  codes     AIBARC POSTNET E 98032      Normally  using the Embedded  E  parameter reduces the height of the  barcode  However  because of POSTNET barcodes  height requirements   characters that would normally be embedded are instead printed below the  barcode  as if the B parameter were used     AIBARC POSTNET N 98032 1122      Hyphens are ignored in POSTNET barcodes  Illegal characters  not digits or  hyphens  are printed as zeros     AIBARC POSTNET R1 4 N 98032      The required ratio for POSTNET barcodes is 1 4  bar gap   but may be  modified using the Ratio  R  parameter 
155. haracters  is printed as a single line of human   readable characters    The twenty second field  up to 14 characters  is printed as a single line of  human readable characters    The twenty third field  up to 14 characters  is printed as a single line of  human readable characters    The twenty fourth field  up to 14 characters  is printed as a single line of  human readable characters     Supplier Address    The twenty fifth field  up to 62 characters  is printed as the supplier s name   city  state  and zip code in a single line of human readable characters     Example  Sending the standard high density Primary Metals data     AIFORM EMETALS_F MTAG  Form Execution Command    HLF2300323534 Human readable Product Identification  AHLF230032353    Barcoded Product Identification  84758465   Human readable Supplier Number  84758465     Barcoded Supplier Number  53233033944 Human readable Serial Number  53233033944 Barcoded Serial Number    A12345B67890C4   Human readable Customer Order    A12345B67890C4   Barcoded Customer Order    8267 266351 Human readable Heat Process Number  8267 26635  Barcoded Heat Process Number    2034  Human readable Actual Weight   2034  Barcoded Actual Weight   01444  Human readable Theoretical Weight Length  01444  Barcoded Theoretical Weight Length   6  Human readable Number of Pieces   6  Barcoded Number of Pieces   0344  Human readable Size    44 0004  Human readable Size  STICK4  Human readable Size  OF4  Human readable Special Data  GUM4  Human
156. he Graphics Pass    M0303000   KLO2DOT PATTERN     prints     yer  bay Pee foe PILLE SAGAO S   ey Y   S AAC ESA e Ce Lyte Sei PA G 3  2 2 Sell e 5 4 Sen Y ERA   S ZS az ST Gee G G He SE Se   tlt    add   4 FF F 4 San Z   G    AKL Turns ON the Half Tone Mode   02 Selects the half tone pattern corresponding to 02     DOT PATTERN  Data to be printed using the selected pattern     Half Tone Toggle    Half Tone Toggle       Once a half tone pattern has been selected  it can be toggled ON and OFF  within a Graphics Pass with the command     Command    KH lt data gt    KH    Example  The Graphics Pass    M0303000GRA    KLOSPHIAKHSC  OP KHTIO KHN    prints     GRASSTCS OPTION  GRA Data printed as solid black   AKL Turns Half Tone Mode ON   05 Selects the 05 half tone pattern   PHI Data printed using selected pattern   AKH Turns Half Tone Mode OFF   CS OP Data printed as solid black   AKH Toggles Half Tone Mode ON  half tone pattern 05    TIO Data printed using the selected pattern   AKH Toggles Half Tone Mode OFF   N Data prints as solid black     Half Tone Reverse Image       The dark background in Reverse Image mode can also be printed using half   tone pattern     Example  The Graphics Pass  M0505000 R KLO9PATTERN KH    prints     Pe ERIN    AR Turns ON the Reverse Image Mode   AKL Turns ON the Half Tone Mode   09 Selects the 09 dot pattern     PATTERN The characters to be printed in Reverse Image  using the Half Tone Mode     AKH Turns OFF the Half Tone Mode     35    Chapter    
157. he horizontal No value will result in the  DPI used to place default setting of 60   elements on the form    VERT An optional parameter that   Enter the vertical DPI  No    value will result in the  default setting of 72        Character Scale Placement                   can be used to specify  Characters Per Inch  settings for print output        SCALE  This is the command Command Identifier  specifier    CHAR Specifies that placement Enter CHAR to specify a  will be done using a character measurement  character scale  scale  columns and rows     LP An optional parameter that   Selections that can be  can be used to specify used are 6  8  9  10  12   Lines Per Inch settings for   and 15  No value will  print output  result in the default setting   of 6 LPI      CPI An optional parameterthat   Selections that can be    used are 10  12  13  15   17  and 20  No value will  result in the default setting  of 10 CPI        318       Index    Symbols    A FF Draft  Fonts  280  A FF NLQ  Fonts  281  A FF OCR A  Fonts  282  A FF OCR B  Fonts  282  A FH Draft  Fonts  283  A FH NLQ  Fonts  284  A FH OCR A  Fonts  285  A FH OCR B  Fonts  285  A FQ Draft  Fonts  277  A FQ NLQ  Fonts  278  A FQ OCR B  Fonts  279  A OCR A  Fonts  279    Numerics    20 CPI Support in PGL  Line Printer Graphics  318  A    Addendum  Line Printer Graphics  311   AIAG Barcodes  Postnet Barcodes  80   AIAG Forms  109   Alphanumeric String Creation Commands  158  ASCII Chart  269   Automatic Decrement  94   Autom
158. hics Pass     M0404000  D05005050x50 dpi     prints        Example 2  The Graphics Pass   AM0505000    D0700724BY A1234567890 G   prints     WE De ak GU    12345678949    Example 3  The Graphics Pass   AM05050007 D060072BYA1234567890 G      prints     UA OA    435678909    Dot Slew    The Dot Slew command moves the paper up by a user specified number of  dot rows  The command has the syntax        Command    Dnn    Arguments   AD The Dot Slew Command   nn Number of dot rows to move the paper up  the  range is from 01 to 99   Form Length       The Form Length command sets the number of lines in a form  This command  must be used outisde a Graphics Pass  The command has the syntax     Command    Lnn or Ann    Arguments  AL or 4H The Form Length Command  Either  L or  H may  be used   nn The length of the form in lines  The valid range is    from 01 to 99     87    Chapter    88    5    Positioning Data    Interrupt Function       With the Interrupt function  a Graphics Pass may be interrupted at a  designated vertical distance from the top of the pass to allow another Pass to  begin printing at that location  The Interrupt command is not processed until a  Pass Terminator is received  Any Code V commands between the Interrupt  and the corresponding Pass Terminator will not be affected by the Interrupt   For example  in the Code V command sequence     AM0202000Interrupts   10434M0101031Can Be    AM0101000Confusing      prints     lnterruPE     S   E Can Be  Cantiusingd    The 0 
159. hics and Text when leaving Graphics or Plot mode     Modplot ON  A single LF advances the print postion one full line  This is the  default setting     Modplot OFF  A single LF advances the print position to the next line position  relative to the top of form     Modplot can be found as a print option in Configuration Menu  under the  Printer section     Example     Line 1  Character Data    On Line 2  Plot Data    Line 3  Character Data  RRA I OS  Line 1  Character Data  oft  Line 3  Character Data    291    Appendix G    292    H Control Panel Selection    Printer Control Panel  Graphics Category       This Appendix lists the Graphics Category parameters in the Configuration  Menu of your printer  It includes changes and additions that were made to the  menu     Graphic Category  Menu Level 1        This category allows you to configure certain aspects of the Graphics  Processing Options on your printer  The Graphic Category contains  parameters CVCC  Code V Command Character   Smooth  PY Then  PN  Then  DarkBar  Version  Descndr  Zero  ModPlot  Vscale  Vertical Scale   and  SFCC  PGL Special Function Command Character   Complete explantions  for these parameters are located in the Graphic Application Manual     Code V Command Character  CVCC  Parameter   Level 2 Menu        This parameter allows you to change the Graphic Command Character  The  default for this parameter is the ASCII caret  4  Decimal 94  HEX 5E   character   Refer to  N Explanation in the Graphic Applicat
160. hree  characters are permitted in the answer     The operator  This is the amount by which the  operand is incremented     Completes the Automatic Incremental Command  and performs a carriage return line feed     Turns OFF the automatic increment decrement  function     Multiple Repeat Commands    Example 3  This example shows how to print sequentially numbered labels   The Automatic Increment command     MREPV 3 0GM0000Vert  Y 1 1 G    NREPH 3 100 G M0101 Horz  Y1 1 G    NREPV 2 0 G M0101VERT  Y1 1 G    NREPENREPENREPE      prints     VERT 1    Horz 1 Horz 2 Horz 3  VERT 1 VERT 2 VERT  VERT 4 VERT 5 VERT 6    VERT 2    Horz 4 Horz 5 Horz 6  VERT 7 VERT 8 VERT  VERT 16 VERT 11 VERT 12    VERT 3    Horz Y Horz 8 Horz 9  VERT 13 VERT 14 VERT 15  VERT 16 VERT 17 VERT 18    Y    Ki    97    Chapter    Repeating Data  Version 1    Repeating Data  Version 1       98    Horizontal Repeat       Horizontal Version 1 repetition can be accomplished by bracketing the  commands and data to be repeated with the commands shown below     Command  Snntt   lt data gt    S      Arguments  AS Version 1 Horizontal Repeat Command  nn Number of times to repeat  00 to 99    tt Number of 0 10 increments to move after each  repeat    lt data gt  Data to be repeated   ASA  Version 1 Horizontal Repeat Terminator     NOTE  Auto increments decrements are not supported within a Version 1  horizontal repeat     Example  The command sequence   S0225   M0202Horz _ S   prints     Horz Horz    Vertical Repeat  
161. iguration parameters to their default values  If forms and logos have been  loaded by other users they will be deleted also  You may also eliminate forms  and logos by sending a Delete Form or Delete Logo Command  The Reset  Command is      el RESET      Table 35  Reset Command    Function Option Modifier Selections               RESET       Erases ALL forms and logos from Enter the current Special Function Control  printer memory  Character followed by RESET           198       Dot Scale Placement  SCALE     Scale Command  Create     Scale Command  Create        There are two commands that define the format that will be used in specifying  where various elements of the form will be placed                  Character Scale Placement    Table 36  Scale Command       Field    Function    Option Modifier Selections       Dot Scale Placement       SCALE     Command Specifier     Enter SCALE        DOT       Specifies that placement will be  done using a dot scale        Enter DOT to specify a dot measurement  scale  dot columns and dot rows         Character Scale Placement                   SCALE  Command Specifier  Enter SCALE    CHAR Specifies that placement will be Enter CHAR  to specify a character  done using a character scale  measurement scale  columns and rows     LP An optional parameter that can be   Selections that can be used are 6  8  9   used to specify Lines Per Inch and 10  No value will result in the default  setting for print output  setting of 6 LPI  Do not for
162. inated with a Pass Terminator   indicating the end of the Graphics Pass  When the printer is in  Free Format Mode  the printer will only recognize       A   and    as  Pass Terminators  When the pritner is not in Free Format Mode   Carriage Return  CR   Line Feed  LF   and Form Feed  FF  may  be used  Throughout the manual       will typically be used to  indicate a Terminator     Multiple Passes    GPL Commands    Most of the examples shown in this manual assume Graphics Mode and Free  Format Mode are turned on  although the examples will not always show the  APY and    F commands  The complete set of commands to turn Graphics and  Free Format Mode On  send GPL commands and data  then turn Free Format  and Graphics Mode Off are shown below     APY   Turns on Graphics Mode  AFA  Turns on Free Format Mode        lt data gt   Sample GPL Command sequences   O  Turns off Free Format Mode   PN   Turns off Graphics Mode    The above lines are typically entered into a file and sent to the printer  or are  written to the printer using a computer language such as BASIC or C with  Free Format and Graphics mode on     The main reasons to turn Graphics mode off are    e To print a large amount of non GPL data    e To reset the Code V to its default startup state   e To send plot data to the underlying emulation     The reamining chapters in this manual discusses how the GPL command  sequences should be formatted  For all subsequent examples in this manual   the following conditions are a
163. included in the Buffered Form Execute to satisfy the  copy counts in the form  Data can be different for each copy  The following  control codes take on special functions within a Buffered Form Copy Repeat  command     A   Caret hyphen  Fills the rest of the current data field  with spaces   Ns  Caret asterisk  Causes all unfilled character    positions in all data fields to be filled with blanks up  to the    Z  End of Copy Repeat  command     dy  Caret comma  Causes all unfilled character  positions in all data fields to be filled with blanks up  to the    Z  End of Copy Repeat  command  and all  character positions in any remaining data fields will  be filled with blanks until the copy count is satisfied     Buffered Form Copy    Example 1 4F4  Free Format ON    AIFORM CEXAMPLE14G  AC034 4M0101This line prints 3 times   Z    AC024 4M0201 This line prints     0204 4Z4   AC044 AM0202This line prints     0204 4Z      N    AIFORM EEXAMPLE14G  2 times    2 times       3 timess0   3 times 0   3 timess0   Ak    AG  AOA Free Format OFF  prints     This line Prints 3 times  This line Prints 3 times  This line Prints 3 times    This line Prints 2 tines   This line Prints 2 times   This line Prints 3 times  This line Prints 3 times  This line Prints 3 times  This line Prints    107    Chapter    108    6    Buffered Forms    Repeat       The Repeat command repeats a sequence of Code V commands and data a  user specified number of times  The number of times to repeat a command or  dat
164. incremental  overlay  or  EVFU data will be used    After the EXECUTE command is sent  several different types of data can be  defined and printed using the following parameters and SFCC commands   Table 17  EXECUTE Form Command Optional Parameters  Field Function Option Modifier Selections          The following parameters are used in forms where Dynamic Incremental Data is included           ICNTn  Optional parameter that specifies Enter ICNT followed by a value ranging  the number of forms that will be from 1   65 535 then the parameter  printed with incremental data fields    delimiter    IRSTn  Optional parameter that specifies Enter IRST followed by a value ranging       how many forms will print before  the incremental data fields will be  reset to their original values        from 1   65 535 then the parameter  delimiter  This value must be less than or  equal to the ICNT amount or the  incremental data fields will not reset           The following information represents an EVFU Form Download sequence        173          Chapter 9    Field    PGL Commands    Table 17  EXECUTE Form Command Optional Parameters    Function    Option Modifier Selections          EVFU Data       Optional parameter that downloads  the EVFU channels  lines  where  Overlay data will be entered    You cannot mix line spacing on  forms that use an EVFU program   Otherwise  the EVFU form is  removed from memory  EVFU  cannot exceed the physical length  of the page  If it does the printer  return
165. inter will wait for another Vertical Line  Command     195          Chapter    9    PGL Commands    Ignore Commands  Normal  Create  and Execute        Good parameters document what they are doing in different sections of their  code by including things such as Comment Fields or REM statements  In PGL  the same type of information can be included in PGL files by bracketing them  with the IGON and IGOFF commands     In addition  some host systems pad the data stream with characters and  spaces before the SFCC  You can use these commands to cause the printer  to ignore these additional characters by inserting the IGON at the end of the  last PGL file and IGOFF at the beginning of the next PGL file  After sending  an IGON Command the printer will ignore ALL characters until it receives an  IGOFF Command  The commands that control the Ignore Mode are        IGON   AND     IGOFF      Table 31  Ignore Commands                Field Function Option Modifier Selections   IGON       Gon Turns Ignore Mode on  The printer   Enter the current Special Function Control  ignores all characters it receives Character followed by IGON   until it receives the IGOFF  sequence    IGOFF    IGOFF Turns Ignore Mode off  The printer   Enter the current Special Function Control          begins processing normally  Character followed by IGOFF        196       Normal Command  Normal and EXECUTE Mode     Normal Command  Normal and EXECUTE Mode     This command can be used in all modes  If the printer is i
166. io refer  to the next wider bar and space  respectively     For example  Code 39 has the ratio 1 1 3 3 which means   e The narrow bars and spaces are each one dot column wide   e The wide bars and spaces are each three dot columns wide     If a barcode style has more than two pairs of numbers  it has more than two  bar space widths  For example  Code 128 has the ratio 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4  Since  this is comprised of four pairs of numbers  four different widths of bars and  sapces are used in this particular barcode     e The narrowest bars and spaces are one dot column wide    e The next wider bars and spaces are two dot columns wide   e The next wider bars and spaces are three dot columns wide   e The widest bars and spaces are four dot columns wide     Ratio numbers may range in value from 0 to F  hexadecimal  That is  a ratio  value of A corresponds to decimal 10 and F corresponds to decimal 15     NOTE  The printer does not verify that a given ratio sequence adheres to the  standard barcode specification  Many barcode ratios will cause the  barcode to fall outside the specifications  resulting in unreadability     High Density Barcode    Example 1  Barcodes can be expanded by doubling the ratio of the light dark  bars  Code 39  which is normally 1 1 3 3 can be printed double  wide by sending the Version 2 Graphics Pass   AM0505000   IBARC C39 R2 2 6 6 E 123454G     prints     IN WWII WD    Example 2  Barcodes can also be expanded by replacing the ratio numbers in  Table 3  pa
167. ion Manual      CVCC Cmd Selections  Menu Level 3     1 255  Decimal designators for ASCII characters     Smooth Parameter  Menu Level 2        This parameter controls the size at which block characters are smoothed  The  default size is 3     Smooth Selections  Menu Level 3   2 99    293    Appendix H Graphic Category  Menu Level 1     294    PY Then Parameter  Menu Level 3        This command defines printer response to characters following the    PY  Command on the same line     PY Then Selections  Menu Level 3   None  Default    All   Term    NOTE  How your printer responds to data and control codes that follow a    PY  Command or a  PN Command on the same line is shown in the  Code V Application section of the Graphics Application Manual in  Appendix l     PN Then Parameter  Menu Level 2        This command defines printer response to characters following the    PN  Command on the same line     NOTE  How your printer responds to data and control codes that follow a    PY  Command or a  PN Command on the same line is shown in the  Code V Application section of the Graphics Application Manual in  Appendix I     PN Then Selections  Menu Level 3   None  Default   All    DarkBar Parameter  Menu Level 2        This parameter allows you to increase the darkness of the barcodes by  changing horizontal dot density from 60 DPI to 120 DPI     DarkBar Selections  Menu Level 3   OFF  Default   ON    Version Parameter  Menu Level 2        This parameter controls the version of Code V 
168. is parameter if a null data field is specified     LOC  Location of Human Readable Characters     Optional parameter that changes the location of the human readable  characters     Enter  No value or B to cause human readable characters to print below the  barcode     Enter  A to cause human readable characters to print above the barcode     FONT    Optional parameter that selects a font for the human readable characters or  suppress printing of human readable characters and trailing portions of the  barcode     Enter    N   10 CPI ASCII  O   10 CPI OCR A  X   10 CPI OCR B    S   Suppress printing the human readable characters and trailing portions of  the barcode     Examples    PDF A X Selects human readable characters above the barcode in 10 CPI  OCR B    PDF S Suppresses printing of human readable characters in the  barcode     STOP    This parameter ends the Barcode Command  The printer remains in Create  Mode     Enter  STOP    This must be present at the end of each individual barcode  For every  BARCODE command you must have a STOP command     209    Chapter 10 PGL Barcodes  Used in CREATE Mode Only     Command Parameters VS Barcode Types    Figure 10 provides a listing of the Barcode Command Parameters which are  used by each Barcode Type     NOTE  Since all Barcode Types use the BARCODE  Name  and STOP  parameters they are not present in the figure  The first parameter is  the CD Parameter        Figure 10  Command Parameters VS Barcode Types    210    Data Field Ch
169. lanopqrstuvwxyz  0123456789    NLQ  13 3 CPI  ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  abcdefghi jk lmnoparstuvwxyz  0123456789    NLQ  15 CPI  ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRS TUVWXYZ  abcdefghi jk ImnoparstuvwxyzZ  0123456789    WLQ  17 1 CPI  ABCDEF GHIJKLMNOPORSTUVNXYZ  abcdef ghi jk anopqrstuvexyz  0123456789    4 FQ OCR A 8 B       OCR A  10 CPI  ABCDEF GHIJKLMNOPARSTUVUXYZ    abcdef ghi jklanopqretuvexyz  0423456789    OCR B  10 CPI  ABCDEFGHISKLMNOPQRSTUVUXYZ  abcdefghijklanoparstuvuxyz  0123456789    279    Appendix E  2 FF Draft    A FF Draft       DRAFT  7 5 CPI  ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPORSTUUWXYZ  ABCDEF GH JKLMNOPORS TUUNXYZ  0123456789    Craft   16 CFI  ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUUNKY2Z  abcdef3hijklmrnoPIrstuvuxyz  Di   abe ee    Draft  12 CPI  ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPGRSTUUWXYZ  abcdefghi sk Lmanopqrstuvwxyz    0123456789    Draft  13 3 CPI  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYZ  abcdefghi jk lmnoparstuvwxyz  0123456789    Oraft  15 CPI  ABCDEF CHT IKLHNOPQRSTOVUXYZ  abcdef ghi jk lanoparsiuvyxyz    0123456789    Draft  17 1 CPI  ABCDEF CHI JKLNNOPORS TUVUXVZ  abcdef ghi ic lanopers tuvuxyz  0123436789    280    4 FF NLQ       NLG  10 CPI  ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPORSTUVWX Y Z  abcdef ghi   k1imnopars tuvwxyz    0123456789    NLQ  12 CPI  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPARSTUVWXYZ  abcdefghi jk Imnopqrstuvwxyz    0123456789    NL   13 3 CPI  ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQGRSTUVUXYZ  abcdefghi jk lmnopqrstuvexyz  0123456789    NLO  15 CPI  ABCOEFGRIJKLMNOPQRS TUVUXVZ  abedefghi   klenopqrstuvuxyz    0123456799    NLG  17 1 CPI  ABCDEFGHIJKLHNOPORST
170. lation d ue MEN  see    Check  hex  30 to 39 Number 3A 3A 3A  dec  48 to 57 Calculation    58 58 58  on page 258                          Data Structure  ASCII DC4 Start code nnnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code DC4    hex  14 Start code nnnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 14    dec  20 Start code nnnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 20    Example   10 REM code EAN 13 without HRI   20 LPRINT CHR  27    211      30 LPRINT CHR  26    L3 111  CHR  25     40 LPRINT CHR  20    0123456 789012    CHR  20    50 LPRINT CHR  27     10      245    Chapter    246    11 Data Formats of Barcode Types                               Code MSI Modify Plessey  Syntax  Figures  n  Start Code Stop Code  ASCII    0    to    9    ER ER  hex  30 to 39 3A 3A  dec  48 to 57 58 58  Data Structure  ASCII DC4 Start code n   Stop code DC4  hex  14 Start code n    Stop code 14  dec  20 Start code n    Stop code 20  Example    10 REM code MSI plessey modified  20 LPRINT CHR  27    211     30 LPRINT CHR  26    M3 111  CHR  25       26   40 LPRINT CHR  20    27     50 LPRINT CHR  27    210        0123   CHR  20         Code UPC A With HRI                   Code UPC A With HRI  Syntax  Figures  n  Dieter Start Code SH Stop Code  ASCII  0  to  9  Calculation mt ne me  see    Check HH 7   gt    hex  30 to 39 Number 3A 3A 3A  dec  48 to 57 Calculation    58 58 58  on page 258                          Data Structure    ASCII DC4 Start code nnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code DC4    hex  14 Start co
171. mmand  however  inserts new Execute data into the data  field each time the data field is repeated     The Execute command sequence for EXAMPLE is   AIFORM EEXAMPLE14G   0003 3 Times     Repeats 3 Times  three times   0002 2 Times     Repeats 2 Times  twice    AG   prints     AIAG Forms    REPEAT 3 Times  REPEAT 3 Times  REPEAT 3 Times  REPEAT 2 Times  REPEAT 2 Times    Predefined Forms       Code V comes with the following two predefined forms already stored in  permanent memory     e AIAG form  e Preliminary Metals form    The barcode portions of these predefined forms can be printed at either 120  DPI high density or 60 DPI low density  However  the Halfdot Mode reduces  print speed by approximately 50  during the printing of the barcode s      The predefined forms reside in the printer ROM  If a predefined form is used   it is copied from ROM into the Heap Buffer RAM  The amount of RAM being  used ca be determined by executing the IFORM L command  If the amount of  the RAM becomes insufficient for the creation of new forms  the predefined  forms can be deleted from RAM similar to user defined forms using  AIFORM D or AIFORM R     AIAG Forms    The AIAG  Automotive Industry Action Group  form is a cretion of automotive  industry that utilizes both barcode and human readable characters to create a  standardized label for shipping and identification  The CVCC contains high  density and low density versions of the AIAG form in ROM  The names of  these forms are     e AIAG_H M
172. mode  print cycles occurs when either   e the buffer fills     e the home position is moved via a  a Command  a Form Feed  Vertical  Tab  or VFU command     e the printer exits from the Barcode Block Character mode  ESC  lt 41 where  1   lower case L      Entering Barcode Block Mode       To enter the Barcode Block Character mode  send the following escape    sequence   ESC   lt 4h ASCII  1B 5B 3C 34 68 hex    Upon each entry into the Barcode Block Character mode  the following default  conditions are established     e Home and cursor are initialized  see Home and Cursor later in this  manual      e Normal Density printing is selected for both the Barcode Submode and  the Block Character Submode     Once you are in the Barcode block Character mode  changing a parameter in  one Submode also changes that same parameter in the other Submode  For  example  selecting Double Density in Block Characters also selects Double  Density in Barcode     Invalid Commands       The following commands are invalid while in Barcode Block Character Mode   e Index Forward   e Index Reverse   e Save Cursor Position   e Restore Cursor Vertical Position    122    Exiting Barcode Block Character Mode    Exiting Barcode Block Character Mode       To exit the Barcode Block Character Mode  send the following escape  sequence     Command ESC   lt 41  lower case L  ASCII  1B 5B 3C 346C hex    Control Sequence Formatting       All Control Sequences in the Barcode Block Character mode have the same  basic f
173. n CREATE mode or  EXECUTE mode  this command places the printer back into NORMAL Mode   If you are already in NORMAL Mode  sending this command will reset the  printer to its Font and LPI defaults  The command format is        Table 32  NORMAL Mode Command                Field Function Option Modifier Selections   NORMAL_   Initiates NORMAL Mode  Enter the current Special Function Control  Character followed by NORMAL                 PGL Mode Control       Quiet Command  Normal     This command disables the PGL Mode of your printer  The only PGL  command the printer will respond to is the Listen Command  The Quiet    Command format is     Table 33  Quiet Command                Field Function Option Modifier Selections    QUIET Command Specifier  Turns off Enter the current Special Function Control  Graphics Mode  Character followed by QUIET              197       Chapter    9    PGL Commands    Listen Command  Normal     This command re enables the PGL Mode of your printer after a Quiet  Command  The printer will respond appropriately to PGL Commands it  receives  The following command enables Graphics Mode      LISTEN    Table 34  Listen Command       Field    Function Option Modifier Selections               LISTEN       Command Specifier  Turns off Enter the current Special Function Control  Graphics Mode  Character followed by LISTEN           Field    Reset Command  Normal and Execute           this command deletes ALL forms and logos from printer memory and resets  conf
174. n below  Both Graphics and non   Graphics commands and data are repeated vertically     Command    IREPV n vd4G  lt data gt    IREPE    Arguments    AIREPV    n    AG   lt data gt   AIREPE    Vertical Repeat Command    The number of times the data is to be repeated  1  to 9999      Vertical space between each repetition in 0 10  increments  1 to 132      Additional vertical space between repetitions in dot  rows  0 to 9      Command Terminator  The data to be repeated     Repeat Terminator  turns OFF the Horizontal  Repeat Mode     Example 1  The Graphics Pass    IREPV 3 12 1GM0202000REPEAT 3  TIMESAREPE      prints     REPEAT 3 TIMES    REPEAT    TIMES    REPEAT 3 TIMES  Example 2  The command sequence    IREPV 3 13   G4M0202000GRAPHICS    PASS      NON GRAPHICS SEQUENCE   AIREPE     mixes  Graphics Pass text with standard text and prints the following     GRAPHICS PASS  NON GRAPHICS SEQUENCE  GRAPHICS FASS  NON GRAPHICS SEQUENCE    GRAPHICS PASS    NON GRAPHICS SEQUENCE    91    Chapter 5 Repeating Data  Version 2    Multiple Repeat Commands       A Graphics Pass may contain more than one Repeat Start Repeat End pair   When a Graphics Pass contains more than one pair of Repeat Start Repeat  End commands  the additional pairs are described as being    nested    inside  the Graphics Pass  The nexted pairs are matched by pairing the first Repeat  End with the last Repeat Start continuing in sequence until the last Repeat  End is paired with the first Repeat Start     In the ex
175. n properly with the bomb making a form header  Also  we will  create a form title  the instructions for the form  and end with the first question     ALPHA   4 30 0 0  Job Application    5 30 0 0 Explosives Handler    E D 7 10 0 0  emolitions Are US    10 6 0 0  Answer ALL Questions  If you do not under    11 6 0 0  stand a question or have no answer for a    12 6 0 0  question  stop where you are and deposite your    13 6 0 0  application in the receptacle by the front    14 6 0 0  door as you leave the premises    16 6 0 0  1      16 10 0 0  Are you afraid of loud noises     STOP    Follow this section with a horizontal line command to place a line where the  answer to the first question should go   HORZ    1 16 10 41 46  STOP    Continue this procedure until all questions with answering spaces composed  and in place  Also include a closing logo        201    Chapter 9 Practice    The following program combined with the program for creating the BOMB log  would produce the form in Figure 9 on page 203     CREATE  JobAppl 612  BOX   3 3 3 48 52   STOP   LOGO   4 5 BOMB   42 5 BOMB   STOP   ALPHA   4 30 0 0  Job Application    5 30 0 0  Explosives Handler  E D 7 10 0 0  emolitions Are US    10 6 0 0  Answer ALL Questions  If you do not under    11 6 0 0  stand a question or have no answer for a    12 6 0 0  question  stop where you are and deposit your    13 6 0 0  application in the receptacle by the front    14 6 0 0  door as you leave the premises    16 6 0 0  1     16 10 0
176. n readable characters will be printed  below the barcode   A The Code 39 barcode style  see Table 3    12345 The data to be encoded as a barcode     63    Chapter    64    4    Example 2  The Graphics Pass    M0515000   CYD67890   G    prints     AMO515000    AC   Y   D  67890                                            Turns ON the Graphics Pass Mode  Barcode height  is 1 5 inches with no vertical justification     Indicates the barcode orientation will be vertical   Non OCR human readable characters will print   The Codabar barcode style  see Table 3      The data to be printed as a barcode and human   readable characters     Barcode Version 2       The Version 2 command for printing a barcode is   Command Default Ratio     IBARC x a  lt data gt  G  Variable Ratio  IBARC x R lt ratio gt  a  lt data gt    G    Arguments  AIBARC    Xx    R     lt ratio gt     Turns on the Barcode Mode     The index name of one of the barcode styles  selected from Table 3     Specifies that a ratio specification sequence  follows     A sequence of bar space ratios of the form r1r2r3r4  or rir2r3r4r5r6r7r8  where r variables take on  values 00 through OF  hexidecimal     NOTE  Colons must be used for Version 2 to separate the ratio parameters     a    Controls the Autoprint feature  prints human   readable characters in the currently selected font    You can choose from     N  turns off autoprinting     E  human readable characters are printed partially  embedded into the bottom of the barcode r
177. n the placement of the human readable text  portion of a barcode  Version 2 commands have the advantage of including  the name of the barcode style in the command  Either command must be  contained within a valid Graphics Pass for it to be recognized by the printer     The Version 1 command allows the barcodes to be printed in two orientations   1  Horizontal  2  Vertical  rotated 90 degrees clockwise from horizontal      The orientation of a Version 1 barcode is independent of the orientation of the  Graphics Pass it is in     The orientation of Version 2 barcode is the same as the Graphics Pass in  which it appears  Thus  Version 2 barcodes may be printed in any of the four  Graphics orientations     Regardless of the command style used  all Barcode commands must occur  within a Graphics Pass     Barcode Density       A control panel option  Darkbar  defines the Barcode density  If set to ON  the  density will be high  The default setting of this option is OFF     Barcode Height       The overall height of a barcode is determined by the window height  when the  barcode is horizontal or upside down  or width  when the barcode is vertical  right or vertical left  as specified in the  M sequence that precedes the  Barcode Command Sequence  Human readable characters are included in  the overall barcode height     The height range is   e 02 to 99  0 2 to 9 9 inches  without human readable characters  HRC    e 03 to 99  0 3 to 9 9 inches  with human readable characters  HRC      
178. ncrements of 0 1 inches  0 25 cm   from 001 to 132  0 1 to 13 2 inches or 0 25 to 33 53 cm      Additional horizontal length of the box in dot columns  ranging  from O to 9     Vertical height of the box in increments of 0 1 inches  0 25 cm      Additional vertical height of the box in dot columns  ranging from  O to 9     Thickness of the top and bottom borders of the box  ranging from  1 to 9 dot rows     Thickness of the two vertical borders of the box  ranging from 1 to  9 dot columns     The command    LB0250010062     prints the following box     ALB The Box command   0250 The lengths of the top of the bottom borders are 2 5  inches  1 27 cm  with no additional dot columns    0100 Line lengths of the left and right borders are 1 inch  each  2 54 cm  with no additional dot rows    6 Line thickness for top and bottom borders is 6 dot  rows    2 Line thickness for the right and left borders is 2 dot  rows     53    Chapter    54    3 Boxes    Example 2  The command    LB0250010025     prints the following     ALB  0250    0100    2  4    The Box command    Line lengths for top and bottom borders of 2 5  inches  6 4 cm  with no additional dot columns     Line lengths for left and right borders of 1 0 inches   2 54 cm  with no additional dot rows     Thickness of top and bottom borders is 2 dot rows   Thickness of left and right borders is 4 dot columns     Example 3  The command    LB0010025046     prints the following     ALB  0010    0250    The Box command    Line length
179. nd command  functions  This chapter contains the following sections     Control Sequences       This section describes the escape sequences used in entering and exiting the  Barcode Block Character mode  and how to select the various functions  i e    Normal Double Density  barcode styles  sizes of block characters  moving the  cursor for justification  etc       Home And Cursor       This section describes the operational differences between the Home position  and the cursor in Block Character mode     Barcodes       This section provides printed examples of the available barcodes  It also  provides related encoding information such as data limits  check digits  etc     Block Characters       This section provides printed examples of changing the sizes of block  characters  and mixing characters with barcodes     Command Summary       This section provides a summary of the escape sequences and command  functions discussed in this manual     121    Chapter 7 Control Sequences    Control Sequences       This section describes the escape sequences for entering and exiting the  Industrial Graphics Barcode Block Character mode  The commands for  accessing related functions  such as selecting Normal or Double Density  Block Characters  vertical or horizontal orientation of barcodes  line height   and others are also discussed  To properly use the Industrial Graphics option   the printer needs to be in the MT660 emulation     Print Cycles       While in the Barcode Block Character 
180. ne Mode ON and defaults to last  pattern selected  EA      Toggles ON Half Dot Mode     Data printed with the selected pattern  EA  in Half   Tone Half Dot Mode     Toggles OFF Half Dot Mode   Toggles OFF Half Tone Mode        Block character fonts are created from the block character set in four graphic  orientations  and are available in the following sizes     e 7 5 CPI block characters  0 2 inches high   e 10 CPI block characters  0 1 inch high     e 12 CPI block characters  0 1 inch high     e 15 CPI block characters  0 1 inch high     7 5 CPI       The 7 5 CPI character set is 2 10 inches high and 0 15 inches wide  0 51 cm  high by 0 38 cm wide   All characters in this set are printed in upper case   even if the characters received from the host are lower case     Command   M U V E 0000jjD lt data gt       Arguments  NM U V E     0000    IR     lt data gt     One of four Graphics Pass orientations  4M for  horizontal     V for clockwise rotation     E for  counterclockwise rotation  or  U for upside down  and reverse order of characters      A height width value of 0000 specifies 7 5 cpi  characters     Justification values in increments of 0 1 inches   0 25 cm  and dot rows as discussed in the  Graphics Pass Command description below  This  field may be omitted entirely if the justification value  is zero     The characters to be printed     Example  The Graphics Pass    M00000007 5 CPI CHARACTERS   prints     Zei CPI CHARACTERS    37    Chapter    38    2    Block Cha
181. nly 1  then the field  will be incremented each time it prints    RSTn  Optional parameter that specifies Enter RST followed by a numeric value  the number of times this from 1 to 65 535  then the parameter  incremented field will print before it   delimiter  The default reset value is 0   is reset to the starting point  which means that the field will not be   reset    This parameter defines the ASCII See the explanation on Incremented Static  tSTARTDATAL character string that will be printed   Alphanumeric Strings for how to construct       in the specified location        the starting field    Enter the delimiter followed by the  alphanumeric string and end the entry with  the data delimiter     NOTE  The delimiter cannot be used in  the alphanumeric string        The following parameters are used in forms where Incremental Dynamic Barcode Data fields have    been defined  You may enter as many of the following    fields as were originally defined on the form                  BFn   Optional parameter that specifies Enter the Special Function Control  one of the previously defined Character followed by IBF  then by the  Incremental Dynamic Barcode assigned number of the desired Barcode  Data fields  Data Field  End the entry with the  parameter delimiter   idir  Optional field specifying whether Enter a plus sign    or leave this field blank       the data field will be incremented or  decremented        to increment in a positive direction   Enter a minus sign    to decrem
182. nncnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnononononnnnnnninnnons 141  Block Character Glzes niine a a a a a e 141  Normal Density   M  Examples AA 141  Other Size Variations      oooooocccnccncccncnnnonooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononnonnnnnnnnnnos 142  Double Density   D  Examples A 143  Mixing Barcode Block Characters A 144  Command Summary Table    145  PGL Menu Operations        nnnnooooonnnnnooeennnnnneeennne 147  INTO UC ION tai A at en ee 147  PGL Menu Parameter  147  Graphic Menu Caiegonm  cocoa no nona na nanacnnanacanannrs 148  PGL Graphic Parameters   cooococonnccccnoccccnncnnnonnnnnancn nana cnn nan nn nana ncnnanccnnns 149  Smooth Parameter   ccoconccccccucccncnnncnnnnnoononnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonnnnnnonnnnnnnnnnns 149  Darkbar Parameter    149  Vscale Parameters  ci   150  Zero Parameter    occcccccccncccnnnonononnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonononannn 150  SECC AMAME io ie a ete 150  PGL Command  Set iii a 151  PGL Command Set Standards miii tea 151  Special Function Control Character  FC    151  Parameter Delimiter asainn ee eir gate  rd ees 151  E EE 151  Line Terminator    ooocnnnnnncccccnnnnonononenonononnnnonnnononononononnnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnos 151  Printable Data Delimiter             00nn0nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnerenennreeensessssnenen 152  SPACES ii tido rro dl e ito 152  Command Parameters   ocoooocccccccccnccccnnooooonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnanonnnnnnnnnnnoos 152  Form And Logo Names nesini a 152  Numeric Variables             nannnnnnnnnnnennennreenesesnesssssnrnsnennnnnnnr
183. nrnrnrnnene 153  COMME  A et 153  Print Position LOCATION         cccccccccncnnnnnnnncnnnnnnnnonononononoonrnonanananrnnn 153  Data Types  154  Double Density Printing  DARK Parameter   154    PGL2MOd S iether ee ee eb ec eee rea 155    Table of Contents    EIERE ET 155  Command Presentation     ooncoccnnccconncccccncccnnnccnnanana nano na naa canana canas 157  Alphanumeric String Creation Commands  Create   158  Incremented Static  Fixed  Alphanumeric Strings             0s s0seeeee 161  STEPMASK  Increment Information Field    162  STARTDATA  Incremented Field     162  Dynamic Incremented Alphanumeric Gringen 166  Form Length Commands  Create   166  Duplication Commands  Create     167  Using Duplication Commande A 169  Page Number Command  Create   170  Reverse Print Command  Createi  171  Exit CREATE Mode  Create     172  EXECUTE Mode  Normal             cccceceeeeeeeeeneeeeeceeeseneeeseneeeeeneeeteas 172  Box Command  Create             cccccccceeceeeeceneeeseneeseeeeeseeeeseeeeseas 177  Using The Box Commande 179  Call LOGO Command  Create   180  Change LPI Command  Normal and Exvecute   181  Change SFCC Command  Normal and Execute    ooooocinocccccncc     182  Create Corner Frames  Create    183  Using The Corner Commande 185  Create Form Command  Normal   186  Create Logo Command  Normal  187  Delete Form Command  Nomalt  191  Delete Logo Command  Normal     oocconccccinccccnnoccccnnccconancninnninnos 191  Density Command  Normal and Exvecute  192  Directory Command  
184. nting thereby  affecting print speed  symbol length  and readability through white black and    wide narrow ratios     For typical applications  the default values produce fully readable Barcode   however  a range of settings is provided to accomodate softer papers or drier  ribbons  and to optimize size or throughput for special applications     Command  W  unit width   centers   dots NL    Arguments   unit width      centers      dots     Unit bar or space width in 600th inch increments   400th if dots   3   Range 9 to 13 default   11     Center to center dot spacing along the length of the  bars in 600th inch increments  Range 4 to 10   default   5     Number of dots per unit bar or space  Range 1 to 3   default   1     When dots   1  the bar width is one printed dot per  Barcode unit width  The bar to bar space is one  unprinted dot per unit width     When dots   2  the number of dots for an N wide  bar is 2N1  An N wide space is 2N   1     When dots   3  the number of dots for an N wide  bar is 3N1  An N wide space is 3N 1     Printing speed is directly proportional to the values  of unit width and centers  and print speed is half as  great for dots   2 or 3 as for dots   1  The default  print speed is 36 inches per minute     Paper Motion Commands    Home And Cursor       The Home position and cursor pointers in this manual are similar in function to  the Home and cursor pointers in a CRT terminal     e Upon entering the Barcode Block Character Mode  the Home position i
185. ntrol panel  When you exit from  Graphics Mode  the Command character is reset to the value  selected through the Control Panel     However  if the Command Character is set through the control panel  inside of Graphics Mode  that character stays in effect only until you   exit Graphics Mode  after which the Command Character is reset to   the value you selected through the control panel outside of Graphics  Mode  As with the  N Command  if a config  report is printed while in  Graphics Mode  it will show the character chosen through the control  panel inside of the Graphics Mode     All Graphics Mode commands in this manual are shown using the  default   caret symbol     Turning Free Format On    Free Format       The GPL provides a mode which ignores all data with values less than 20   decimal 32   Data having values below decimal 32 are collectively called  Control Characters and include Line Feed  Form Feed  and Escape  characters  By using Free Format Mode  the user can filter out unwanted  Control Characters which may be sent by some host systems  Also  a  convenient way to send GPL commands to the printer is to simply type the  commands into a file and send the file to the printer  In Format Mode  a  command may be spread over several lines in the file  with the printer ignoring  the CR and LF characters at the end of each line     NOTE  The Free Format ON OFF commands may not be used within the  data field of a Report or a Buffered Form     Turning Free Format On      
186. o  EA  Unit  Separator  wc US 31  2F       269    Appendix B    270    C    Logos    49    4A    Wl    4B    61    62       Appendix C    272    D Patterns    E    d a    Se e                                 SES Sr  ii SN    1  1  SE Lo    36    14 15                            7  F                      33 39    49 41  Se       31                                                                                     A 3B 3c    3E 3F  H  ld  44 45 46 a   43 49 4 Ze 40  gt     51 52 EK 55 56                                                                                                                                          273    Appendix D                                                                  59 5A 5B 5E SF  i  ul  H  66  6E  70 e          YA       274       275    Appendix D    276    E    A FQ Draft    Fonts       DRAFT  7 3 CPI    ABCDEF GHI JKLNNOPORS TUVWXYZ  ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUUNKY2Z  6123456789    Draft  16 CPI    Draft    Draft  gt     Draft     ABCOUEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUUNWKYZ  abcdefGhiJklanoPorstuvwxyz    412346789       12 CPI    ABCDEFGH I JKLMNOPOQRSTUUNKYZ  abodnf 9hiJjkimnoPOrstuuwxyz  6123456789    13 3 CPI   ABCDEF GHI JKLMNOPQRSTUULIXYZ  abcdef9hi jkianoParstuvwxsz  9123456789    15 CPI   ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRS TUU TZ  abcdef hi JklanoPIrstuvwxyz  9123436789    Appendix E    A FQ NLQ    A FQ NLQ       278    NLQ  10 CPI  ABCDEF GHIJKLMNOPQRS TUVWXYZ  abcdefghi jk Imnopaqrstuvwxyz  0123456789    NLQ  12 CPI  ABCDEFGHI JKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ  abcdefghi jk 
187. o print any Code V font  excluding OCR  when     FF is selected   This is the default     Command 4 FF    Half Space Font Mode    Half Space Font Mode       Selects 60 DPI  fast speed  lowest quality fonts  The paper will not back up to  print any GPL font  excluding OCR  when     FH is selected     Command 4 FH    Lines Per Inch       The number of character lines per inch may be set with the command   Command     Lnn    Arguments  AOL The Lines Per Inch Command   nn One of the lines per inch numbers below   03   3 LPI  04   4 LPI  06   6 LPI  08   8 LPI    Dump Mode       The data received from the host may be printed in hexadecimal Dump Mode  format using the Dump Mode command  Dump Mode is typically used to  examine the data received from the host     NOTE  Dump Modes are explained on page 45   Command   Hn    Arguments  A H The Dump Mode Command  n Mode selection  0 or 1 selects Control Panel Dump Mode style 1   2 selects Control Panel Dump Mode style 2   3 selects Control Panel Dump Mode style 3   Hex Command       The Hex Command allows the user to send single hexadecimal values to the  printer  This is useful when you want to send a control code     Command AIHEX xx  Arguments  AIHEX  The Hex Command    XX The hexadecimal value to send to the printer   00   FF      45    Chapter    2    Control Panel Option    Control Panel Option       The following Control Panel option provides more control of speed and  quality     Block Character       This option allows you to se
188. ode     89    Chapter    90    5 Repeating Data  Version 2    Example 1  The command  REPH 2 200 G M0202000REPEAT _N NREPE    prints     REPEAT REPEAT    AIREPH  Turns ON the Horizontal Repeat Mode     2  The number of times the data is to be repeated    200 2 0 inches between the start of each repetition with  no additional dot columns    AMO202000REPEAT     The Graphics Pass containing the character  windows and the data to be repeated     AIREPE Repeat Terminator  turns OFF the Horizontal  Repeat Mode     Example 2  The Graphics Pass    IREPH 2 200 G4M0202000GRAPHICS    A4 A M03030004T0040MODE    4IREPE     prints     GRAPHICS GRAPHICS    MODE MODE    AIREPH  Turns ON the Horizontal Repeat Mode   2  The number of times the data is to be repeated     200 2 0 inches between the start of each repetition with  no additional dot columns     AMO202000 Sets the orientation and size of the character  windows for the first Graphics Pass     GRAPHICS The data to be printed   ALAS Functions as a carriage return and line feed     AMO303000 Sets the orientation and size of the character  windows for the second Graphics Pass     AT0040 Tabs the beginning of the second Graphics Pass  0 4 inches from the left margin     MODE The data to be printed     AIREPE Repeat Terminator  turns OFF the Horizontal  Repeat Mode     Vertical Repeat  Version 2    Vertical Repeat  Version 2       Vertical repetition can be selected by bracketing the commands and data to  be repeated with the commands show
189. ode     Plots the starting row of the field  Whether in dots or characters depends on  the SCALE Command  You may also use XX YY format for plotting starting  print locations explained earlier in the Standards Section     Enter a value ranging from 1 to less than the maximum form length     SC  Starting Column     Plots the starting column of the field  Whether in dots or characters depends  on the SCALE Command  You may also use XX YY format for plotting starting  print locations explained earlier in the Standards Section     Enter a value ranging from 1 to less than the maximum form width       data field    Static barcode data that will be printed at the position specified by SR and SC   This alphanumeric string must be set off by the Character String Delimiter       See    Data Field Characters    on page 211     NOTE  If you have specified dynamic barcode fields earlier in this commad   do not use this parameter     Data Field length and allowable characters depend on the barcode being  defined  The Character String Delimiter character cannot be used as printable  data  but must be included at the beginning and end of the data string     208    Barcode Command Parameters    PDF    Optional parameter that manipulates printing of human readable characters  when it is present  In UPC and EAN barcode this parameter is not necessary  to print human readable characters  human readable characters are the  default condition for these barcodes      Enter  PDF  NOTE  Do not use th
190. ode    Printingis    E 230  Barcode  Heade nenene ine E aaaea cantas caoba Een 230  Data Formats of Barcode TypES A 235  Code E E 235  Code 2 5 Industrial    236  Code 2 5 Interleaved  237  GOCE AA  been ee o ee SE ee 238  Code BCO Matgen A Eeer oc 239    A E AEE E E EEEE ATE 240  CODABA a CEPA ATE AA A ETEA 241  Code EAN 8 With HI    242  Code EAN 8 Without HI    243  Code EAN 13 With HI    244  Code EAN 13 Without HI    245  Code MSI Modify Plessey    oooooconccconnccconoccconoccnonarccnanocananccanannnno 246  Code UPC A With HP    247  Code UPC A Without HI    248  Code UPC E With HI    249  Code UPC E Without HI    250  Code Delta Distance  DM   251    Code 128  asian cinta tists iaa 252    Table of Contents    EAN RK 257  US Postnet Barcode AAA 262  Large Character Printing  CP     263  LCP Character Set US ASCII  LCP Character Set German    264  A Customer Support  267  TallyGenicom Customer Support Center  267  TallyGenicom Supplies Department  267  Corporate OffiCeS aieri iiie eiaa a nn rn caracas 268  B ASCIPC Mart aa augan 269  Ce e Te 271  Rn E 273  Es le E 277  APO   Draft EE 277  Ze EG NCQ  ta da decai 278  A FQ OCR A AR A 279  A note dees devel tevin E E el Me needed 280  get ll Be EE 281  AFF OGRA SB E 282  A O 283  ASRA NCO ctra ads 284  ARH OGRA E 285  E gell Le EE 287  G MOG DION TEE 291  H Control Panel Gelechon    293  Printer Control Panel  Graphics Category   ccococoncccccnocccconcccnaoacananccanns 293  Graphic Category  Menu Level 1     293  Code V Comm
191. ode and LCP Printing  227  Special Function Control Character   case  151   command characters  152   comments  153   DARK parameter  154   data types  154   double density printing  154   form names  152   line terminator  151   logo names  152    numeric variables  153   parameter delimiter  151   PGL modes  155   print position location  153   printable data delimiter  152   spaces  152  Special Function Control Character  PGL  Command Set Standards  151  Standards  PGL Command Set  151  STARDATA  PGL Commande  162  STEPMASK  PGL Commands  162  Supplies Department  267    T    Tables  Block Chararacter Size  301  Two of Five with Ratio  Barcode  136  Two of Five with Ratio  Barcodes  134    U    Unsecured Mode  Barcode and LCP Printing  228  UPC Version A  Barcode  138   UPC A  PGL Barcode Commands  223   UPC E  PGL Barcode Commands  224   US Postnet Barcode  Data Formats of Barcode  Types  262   US ASCII  307   US ASCII LCP Character Set  264   User Defined Barcode Ratios in PGL  Line Printer  Graphics  315   USET Commands in PGL  316   Using Box Command  PGL Commands  179    V    Valid Control Sequences  Industrial Graphics  Application  124  Version 1 Barcode  63  Version 1 Buffered Formatting  116   control code command changes  116  Version 1 Logos  58  Version 2 Barcodes  64  Version 2 Logos  59  Version Parameter  Graphic Category  294  Vertical Justification  Positioning Data  84  Vertical Line Commands  PGL Commands  194    Vertical Repeat  Repeating Data Version 
192. often used to replicate labels  allowing the user  to print numerous labels from a single command sequence  Using a Code V  Repeat command typically results in faster printing since the printer only  needs to process the image to be printed once  then simply duplicates the  image across the page     There are two Repeat Command versions  All of the features of the Version 1  Repeat commands are included in the Version 2 commands  For this reason   it is recommended that the more powerful Version 2 commands be used  whenever possible  The Version 1 Repeat commands are discussed on  page 98     Repeating Data  Version 2       Horizontal Repeat  Version 2       Horizontal repetition can be accomplished by bracketing the commands and  data to be repeated with the commands shown below     NOTE  Non graphics data  i e   any data outside a Graphics Pass  will not be  repeated  The Version 2 Horizontal Repeat command syntax is     Command    IREPH n hhd4   G  lt data gt    IREPE  Arguments  AIREPH  Turns ON the Horizontal Repeat Mode     n  The number of times the data is to be repeated  1  to 9999    hh Horizontal distance in increments of 0 1 inches to    move the print postion relative to the start of the  previously printed  lt data gt   0 to 99      d Number of addtitional dot columns to mvoe the print  position  0 to 9     AG Command Terminator    lt data gt  This represents a sequence of Code V commands  and data    AREPE Repeat Terminator  turns OFF the Horizontal    Repeat M
193. or message along with the offending program code  will print in the place of the barcode  The data fields for EAN 8 and EAN 13  Barcodes can be comprised of the numeric characters 0 9 and special start   stop  and center codes     Interleaved 2 5  l 2 5  Data Fields    The data field length for l 2 5 Barcodes is variable  however it is best to limit  field length to no more than 32 characters to minimize the potential for  scanning errors  In addition  the I 2 5 Barcode requires an even number of  characters in its data field  If an odd number of characters is sent the printer  automatically adds a leading zero to even out the field  The data field for  Interleaved 2 5 Barcodes can be comprised of the numeric characters 0 9     MSI Data Fields    MSI data fields are variable in length up to a maximum of 14 if one check digit  is used and 13 if two check digits are used  The data field for MSI Barcodes  can be comprised of the numeric characters 0 9     213    Chapter 10 PGL Barcodes  Used in CREATE Mode Only     POSTNET Data Fields    POSTNET Barcodes use two data field lengths  A 9 digit data field for Zip   4  and an 11 digit data field for Advanced Barcode format  The data field for  POSTNET Barcodes can be comprised of the numeric characters 0 9     UPC A Codes    This barcode requires exactly 11 digits  The first character is translated as the  number system character  The remaining 10 characters constitute the  barcode data  The data field for UPC A Barcodes can be comp
194. ored in the forms buffer  For this  reason  it does not require a form name     Control Code Command Changes       The following control codes take on different functions when they are used in  the data string that follows the      command     A  Fills the rest of the current data field with spaces if there are  insufficient data characters to fill the current field  The entire data  field is converted to spaces if this is the only input in the field     aS Fills the rest of the current data field with spaces if there are  insufficient data characters to fill the current field  The entire data  field is converted to spaces if this is the only input in the field  All  remaining fields in the Buffered Form are also converted to  spaces unless the fields occur within a Copy command  See     Buffered Form Copy    on page 106 more details     A  A form feed behaves the same as a line feed unless it is used  within a Copy command  Refer to the Copy command section for  more details     116    Control Code Command Changes    Example 1  In this example  the words Shopping List  are part of the Graphics  Pass with the data milk  eggs  and butter  transmitted afterward   Since butter contains the most letters  six characters   the data  field will be 6 bytes  The command     ABA AMO2020005Shopping List   A 0064 A A A    milk     buttereggs     G    will print     ShoPPing Listimilk  ShoPPing List butter  ShoPPing Listiegd9s  ShoPPing List     The word butter  having six characters  com
195. ormat     Command    Xaa bb   NL    Argument  A The Control Sequence Introducer  A The control sequence function selector  Valid  Selectors are A  B  C  D  M  N  R  S  T  U  and W   aa First parameter field for selecting specific values    using decimal numbers  An unlimited number of  digits are allowed  Omitting this field leaves the  current value unchanged  Setting it to    0    selects  the default value  Plus     signs are ignored  but a  minus     sign preceeding a number signifies a  negative value that is invalid     q Separates parameter fields  This must be present if  two or more parameter fields are used or just the  second field is used  e   X   bb NL   It can be  omitted if only the first field will be used   i e    X aa NL      bb Second parameter field for selecting specific values  using decimal numbers  An unlimited number of  digits are allowed  Omitting this field leaves the  current value unchanged  Setting it to    0    selects  the default value  Plus signs are ignored  but a  minus sign preceeding a number signifies a  negative value that is invalid     Additional parameter fields  if applicable      NL Control sequence terminator  Two categories of  terminators are available     e Passive Terminators   the passive  terminators Carriage Return  CR   Line Feed   LF   or CRLF act only as terminators and do not  perform any further action     e Active Terminators   the active terminators  Form Feed  Vertical Tab  Reverse Form Feed   and Paper Instruction
196. ot density from 60 DPI  to 120 DPI        Enter D  or DARK  to select this option        The SR  SC  ER  and EC parameters use the same methods for defining the REVERSE Print  area  Whether in columns or dots depends on the SCALE Command  You may also use the  XX YY format for plotting duplication print locations explained earlier in the Standards Section                       SR  Plots the starting ROW of the field    Enter a value ranging from 1 to one less  than the maximum form length and the  delimiter    SC  Plots the starting COLUMN of the Enter a value ranging from 1 to one less   field  than the maximum form width and the  delimiter    ER  Plots the ending ROW of the field  Enter a range ranging from 2 to one less  The ending row must be greater than the maximum form length and the  than the starting row  delimiter    EC Plots the ending COLUMN of the Enter a value ranging from 2 to the  field  The ending column must be maximum form width   greater than the starting column    STOP Command Terminator  Enter STOP and the printer waits for a new          command  Leave it out and the printer will  wait for another REVERSE Command        171       Chapter 9 PGL Commands    172    Exit CREATE Mode  Create        To exit the CREATE mode after creating your image  enter the following  command     END    When the printer receives this command it stores the work you have done and  returns to NORMAL Mode     EXECUTE Mode  Normal        To use the commands listed above to execu
197. phics Mode may be entered while the printer is in any emulation  Graphics  Mode should not be entered while the printer is in Plot Mode  The printed  output of Code V adheres to all the applicable Control Panel settings  such as  LPI  CPI  Form Length  etc       NOTE  All escape sequences in this manual are in ASCII notation     Turning Graphics Mode On       Graphics Mode is turned on with command    PY  which must begin in the first  column of a line  followed by one of the following six terminators     1      caret hyphen   2  A   caret asterisk   3      caret comma   4  Carriage Return  5  Line Feed   6  Form Feed    Once the printer is in Graphics Mode  the data it receives is read into a Pass  buffer  The printer will stop looking for characters from the host and process  the data held in this buffer when one of the terminators is received  If the  buffer fills up before receiving a Pass Terminator  data in the buffer will be  processed and printed before the printer accepts any more characters     PY Then    When Graphics Mode is on    e The control panel displays ONLINE GRAPHICS   e All GPL commands and data are processed by Code V  e Non GPL data is passed to the current emulation     PY Then    This control panel option defines the action taken on characters that are on  the same line as the Graphics Mode On Command     PY   The options are All   Term  and None  The default is None  These options are defined as follows        All  All data following Graphics Mode On
198. pletely fills up its data field and  doesn   t require a    to fill out the data field  If a    had been used after butter   then a blank field would have been created  as it was at the beginning of the  data sequence by the second        117    Chapter 6 Version 1 Buffered Formatting    Example 2  The Buffered Repeat command described in the Version 2  Buffered Form section can also be used with Version 1 Buffered  Forms as illustrated in this example  The command sequence     ABA ARA AMO2020005Shopping List   NOO6A   AZA A    0001 milk     0002butter   0003eggs       Weld    will print   ShoPPin3 Listimilk  ShoPPinY9 List butter  ShoPPinY8 List tbutter  ShoPPinY9 List ses  ShoPPingd List ges  ShoPPin9 List  e99s    118    Control Code Command Changes    Example 3  The Buffered Copy command described in the Version 2 Buffered  Form section can also be used with Version 1 Buffered forms as  illustrated in this example     AB4 4C024 4M0202000Shopping List     AO064     AZA A A   milkA milk2   butterbutter  eggs    eggs      A A AGA     will print     ShoPP in39  ShoPPing    ShoPPing  ShoPPing    ShoPPing  ShoPPing    ShoPPing  ShoPPing    Listimilk  Listimilk    Listibutter  Listibutter    List ieg9s  List e99s    List   List     119    Chapter 6 Version 1 Buffered Formatting    120    7 Industrial Graphics  Application    Introduction       This Industrial Graphics manual describes how to print several different types  of barcodes and block characters using escape sequences a
199. port Center       IMPORTANT Please have the following information available prior to calling the  TallyGenicom Customer Support Center     e Model number    Serial number  located on the back of the printer   e Installed options  e  interface and host type if applicable to the problem     e Configuration printout  Go to the Help Menu on the control panel menu   then press the MENU ENTER key to print a configuration report     e Is the problem with a new install or an existing printer   e Description of the problem  be specific     e Good and bad samples that clearly show the problem  faxing of these  samples may be required     Americas  714  368 2686  Europe  Middle East  and Africa  31  24 6489 311  Asia Pacific  65  6548 4114  China  86  800 999 6836  http   www tallygenicom com service default aspx    Ah   sch    TallyGenicom Supplies Department       Contact the TallyGenicom Supplies Department for genuine TallyGenicom    supplies   Americas  800  733 1900  Europe  Middle East  and Africa 33  0  1 46 25 19 07  Asia Pacific  65  6548 4116   or  65  6548 4182  China  86  400 886 5598    http   www tallygenicom com supplies default aspx    267    Appendix A Corporate Offices    Corporate Offices       268    Printronix  Inc    14600 Myford Road  P O  Box 19559   Irvine  CA 92623 9559  Phone   714  368 2300  Fax   714  368 2600    Printronix  Inc    Nederland BV   P O  Box 163  Nieuweweg 283  NL 6600 Ad Wijchen   The Netherlands   Phone   31  24 6489489   Fax   31  24 648949
200. r all subsequent Graphics Passes  When issued inside a  pass  it sets the left print position for that pass only     The command syntax for a Horizontal Tab is   Command    4Thhhd  Arguments   AT Horizontal Tab Command    hhh Horizontal distance from the left margin specified in  increments of inches  0 25 cm  from 000 to 132   00 0 to 13 2 inches or 0 to 33 5 cm      d Additional number of dot columns  from 0 to 9     Example 1  The command    M10104T0152A     prints an A tabbed 1 5 inches  plus 2 dot columns to the right or the left margin     ATO152 Places block character A 1 5 inches plus 2 dot  columns right of the left margin     83    Chapter    84    5    Positioning Data    Example 2  Since the tab command always specifies the print position    relative to the left margin  it is possible to back up to previously  printed positions within the line  For instance  the following  example prints B before A even though A appears before B in the  command sequence    M0505   T0100A    TOOOOB         BA    ATO100 Places block character A 1 inch right of the left  margin   ATOO00 Places block character B at the left margin     Vertical Justification       The print position may be changed vertically with the Vertical Justification  command  This command allows the user to specify a print position below the  top of the current Graphics Pass  The command syntax is     Command    Argument    Example     AJxxd  AJ Vertical Justification Command  xxd Specifies how far down from the
201. r is switched OFFLINE  all defined barcodes are printed out  completely     NOTE  The barcode remains resident in the background and can be  activated again by the barcode bracket  Text justification and  centering are both permitted  With activated barcodes these functions  are not carried out  since they lead to conflicts with the barcodes     Transparent Barcode LCP Commands    Following control codes in Barcode strings can be substituted by the  appropriate MTPL sequences  see    Special Features    on page 227      Table 44  MTPL Sequences Barcode Strings Substitution                            Control Code ANSI Sequence  CSI   Hex 9B or ESC     SUB CSI 26 Space s  EM CSI 25 Space s  DC4 CSI 20 Space s  DLE CSI 16 Space s  Sl CSI 15 Space s  MTPL sequences without matching parameters will be ignored              These sequences may only be used with activated barcodes     231    Chapter 11 Barcode Printing    Barcode Print Feature F for Selection of F Code    HRI or normal compressed as well as single or double pass is switched via  character F according to the following table              ASCII   Hex  HRI 2  Print Pass     Direction 2   Char    Value   On Off   Normal   Compr    Double   Single   Unidir    Bidir   SP 20   x x   x g x      21     D D     x E   x    22 D   D   x   x      23 X keng Xx     X   Sc x    24   x   x x     x      25   x   x x       x   amp  26 D     x x   x    i 27 x     keng x x     x    28   Xx Xx       x x      29   Xx x         x   x  S 2A x
202. racter Fonts    10 CPI       The 10 CPI block character set is 0 1 inches high and is selected by using the  following Graphics Pass Command     Command     M U V E 0101jjd lt data gt         Arguments  NM U V E     0101    jjd     lt data gt     One of four Graphics Pass orientations   M for  horizontal   V for clockwise rotation   E for  counterclockwise rotation  or  U for upside down  and reverse order of characters      A height width value of 0101 specifies 10 CPI  characters     Justification values in increments of 0 1 inches   0 25 cm  and dot rows as discussed in the  Graphics Pass Command description below  This  field may be omitted entirely if the justification value  is zero     The characters to be printed     Example 1  The Graphics Pass  M0101000HORIZONTAL 10 CPI   prints     HORIZONTAL 18 CPI    Example 2 4M0101000HORIZONTAL 10 CPI  AMO202000HORIZONTAL 5 CPI   prints     HORIZONTAL 10 CPI    HORIZONTAL 3 CPI    12 CPI    12 CPI    The 12 CPI character set is 0 1 inches high and is selected with the following  special Graphics Pass command     Command     M U V E 0001jjD lt data gt    Arguments           M U V E  One of four Graphics Pass orientations   M for  horizontal     V for clockwise rotation     E for  counterclockwise rotation  or  U for upside down  and reverse order of characters      0001 A height width value of 0001 specifies 12 cpi  characters   jjd Justification values in increments of 0 1 inches     0 25 cm  and dot rows  as in the Graphics Pa
203. racter width of 0 3 inches  0 76 cm    04 Justified down 0 4 inches  1 0 cm    0 No additional dot rows of justification     31    Chapter 2 Descender Mode    e Third Command      M0303020s    AM Horizontal orientation of characters   03 Character height of 0 3 inches  0 76 cm    03 Character width of 0 3 inches  0 76 cm    02 Justified down 0 2 inches  0 51 cm    0 No additional dot rows of justification  S Data to be printed    e Fourth Command    M0303000s    AM Horizontal orientation of characters   03 Character height of 0 3 inches  0 76 cm    03 Character width of 0 3 inches  0 76 cm    00 No justification down   0 No additional dot rows of justification  S Data to be printed     Descender Mode       The Descender Mode is recognized only within a Graphics Pass   M   V   E   or  U has been previously sent   It can be toggled on and off as often as  desired within a Graphics Pass  and it is terminated when the Graphics Pass  terminates  The amount of space reserved for descenders is defined as two  dot rows for each 0 1 inches  0 25 cm  of character height  There are two  different formats for the Descender Mode  These can be toggled from the  control panel via the Descender option in the Graphics Category menu to  either Fixed or Auto     If set to Fixed the descender gap is always present whenever theDescender  Mode is turned on  even if no descenders are printed     If set to Auto  the descender gap appears only when descenders are printed   if no descenders are printe
204. raphics Application                           121  uge el erte TEE 121  Control SEQUENCES     ococococccconccccnoncnonnncnnonncnnanncarannnnnnnn nn nannn canarias 121  A coataaaaaceaaseaaavevaye 121  Barcode iia a diia 121  Block Characters riesaa a ar aR a a aAA ERAR S ESA ERARAS 121  Command Gummanm eoccccoccccnaccnononcnonnncnnnnnncnnn cnn nan ncnnnn rca nnnncananacanns 121  Control SequenGes mimica 122  Print CYCIOS AA 122  Entering Barcode Block Mode A 122  Invalid Commande escu  earder ae aaa ae Aaa 122  Exiting Barcode Block Character Mode A 123  Control Sequence Formatting      oooonocccinncccinocccnnccccnanacnnanacanancnnnno 123  Valid Control Geouences  ca nannnn nan ncnannn 124  Home And CUSO coesa a EAE EE EEA RESA 129  Paper Motion Commande   ococcccccccnocccononcnnonccnnanononancn crac na nanacnnnnos 129  o EE 130  Code 39  Types 1 And 3 130  Emulation Limitations asis iee e aa aer a nana ia aaa ea aian ata 130  Code 39 Type 1 Examples           cccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeteneeseeaeess 132  Code 39 Type 2 ExampleS   o ooocccnocccnoccccconccconoccnannncnonacananancnann canas 133  Two of Five with 2 1 Ratio  Type pi  134    Interleaved Two of Five  2 1  Type 7    occoncooccccnnnconccnnnnanancnnnnnannos 135    Table of Contents    Two of Five with 3 1 Ratio  Type  0  136  Interleaved Two of Five  3 1  Type 11        c cc eeceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeees 137  UPC Version A  Type 191 138  EAN A3 TypO Tiida 139  EAN 8  TypO EE 140  Block Characters      ccccccnncccooooccc
205. red first and the 1  figure last  For the formats for the Add   On barcodes  the printer expects the check number as the first figure  This is    257    Chapter 11 Data Formats of Barcode Types    not printed in the barcode  The following numbers  2 or 5  are printed from left  to right in Add On barcode     Example 1  EAN13 barcode with HRI and Add On 2 extention    Format  DC4 nnnnnnn nnnnnn cnn DC4    10 REM code EAN 13 with add on 2 extention   20 LPRINT CHRS  27      11      30 LPRINT CHRS  26     K3 111  CHRS  25      40 LPRINT CHRS  20     0123456 789012 012   CHRS  20     50 LPRINT CHRS  27      10      IN  o  123 789012 ul       456    Example 2  EAN13 barcode with HRI and Add On 5 extention    Format  DC4 nnnnnnn nnnnnn cnnnnn DC4    10 REM code EAN 13 with add on 5 extention   20 LPRINT CHRS  27      11      30 LPRINT CHRS  26     K3 111  CHRS  25      40 LPRINT CHRS  20     0123456 789012 012345   CHRS  20     50 LPRINT CHR   27      10      A agt  ol23436 4 a902 0 MUMENTI       456    Check Number Calculation    The following barcode types must be given a check number for transfer to the  printer     e Type H and    EAN 8    e Type K and L  EAN 13   e Type N and O  UPC A   e Type P and Q  UPC E     The check number  c  is transferred after the barcode information  n   For the   EAN  type  this is printed as the last figure in the HRI data line  For the  UPC   type  the check number is not printed in the HRI data line     258    EAN 128    The commercial barcodes 
206. rised of the  numeric characters 0 9     UPC E Codes    This command requires exactly 11 digits  The first character is always 0  The  next five characters constitute the manufacturer   s number and the five ending  characters represent the item number  The data field for UPC E Barcodes can  be comprised of the numeric characters 0 9     Incrementing Barcode Data       The basic format for incrementing barcodes are as follows     For Fixed Barcode Data Fields    The bold characters indicate the added parameters that control  incrementation of barcode data    BARCODE   TYPE  VSCAN  MAG  Hn  1 DARK SR SC   idir STEPMASK RPTn  RSTn   STARTDATA    PDF   LOC  FONT   STOP    For Dynamic Bar Code Data Fields    The bold characters indicate the added parameters that control   incrementation of barcode data    BARCODE   TYPE  VSCAN   MAG  Hn  IBFn L DARK SR SC   PDF   LOC  FONT   STOP   NOTE  The actual base commands change depending on the barcode being  defined     214    Code 39    PGL Barcode Commands And Output    This section shows samples of all PGL supported barcodes and what the  output will be on your printer  For each barcode  the basic format is provided  followed by a CREATE program and sample printout of barcode data  Where  possible each barcode will print in a horizontal and vertical  VSCAN   orientation        Code 39                BARCODE      STOP           BFn Ls  DARK    SR    sc        Sample CREATE Code 39 Program     CREATE  C39  BARCODE  C3 9 DAR 5 1   CODE 3
207. rm in printer  memory   AFA   AFFORM CAIG G  AM0504t0 1 004j002    009T 0030   J0544BNAP    0094G  AM05034T0100 j1224 006   T0030  J1744BNAQ        0064G   M0202 T0100 J232  009 M0504 T0030 J254 BNAV  009 G  AM0202 T0100 J312  009 M0504 T0030 J334 BNAM   009 G  ATO000 J000   LB05000 4001 1  AT0000 J120   LS05000001  AT0000  J230   LS04000001  AT0300 J120   LS00010110  4T04400 J230   LS00010170  AMO101  AT00041J002 part no   J013 T0025  P     102    Control Code Command Changes    AT00044J122QUANTITY   J1334T0025  Q   AT00044J232 SUPPLIER   J2414T0025  V   AT00044J312 SERIAL   J3234T0025  S   AM01000007T0030 J386  N 055 5      2  The following Execute command inserts data into the data fields and  prints the AIAG form as follows     AIFORM EAIGAG   12345674    12345674    123454 123454    1234564    1234564    123456789   123456789   Company Name Goes Here AG    PARE  mo     12345  NATAAN     nn    DIS L  HEIN  A                       ERE                                  SE       RIAL    UI    8               onean    Nase ane toes He Here    Chapter    104    6    Buffered Forms    Buffered Form Delete       Any existing form or label can be deleted from the printers memory if  additional space is needed to create a new form  This is done through the  command     Command    IFORM D lt name gt 4G    Arguments  AFORM D Buffered Form Delete Command   lt name gt  the name of the form to be deleted   AG Command Terminator    Buffered Form Reset       This command deletes all user 
208. rom 128C to 128B and vice versa as  necessary to print all of the printable data     Table 41 lists the available characters for Code 128B Barcodes     Table 41  Code 128B Character Set                                                                Character HEX Value Character HEX Value Character HEX Value   Space 20 G 47 g 67    21 H 48 h 68    l 22   49 i 69    23 d 4A j 6A    24 K 4B k 6B    25 L 4C l 6C   amp  26 M 4D m 6D      27 N 4E n 6E    28 O 4F o 6F    29 P 50 p 70     2A Q 51 q 71    2B R 52 r 72    2C S 53 s 73    2D T 54 t 74  2E U 55 u 75     2F V 56 V 76  0 30 W 57 W 77  1 31 X 58 x 78  2 32 Y 59 y 79  3 33 Z 5A H 7A  4 34   5B   7B  5 35   5C   7C                            212    Data Field Characters    Table 41  Code 128B Character Set                                        Character HEX Value Character HEX Value Character HEX Value  6 36   5D   7D  7 37 A 5E   7E  8 38 SS 5F DEL 7F  9 39 i 60 FNC1 21  A 41 a 61 FNC2 22  B 42 b 61 FNC3 23  C 43 c 63 FNC4 24  D 44 d 64 CODEA 25  E 45 e 65 CODEC 27  F 46 f 66 SHIFT 28                         To access the codes in the greyscale area of the table you must send a SO   OE  character followed by the HEX value for the desired code     Code 128C character set includes Start B code  HEX 26      Codes EAN 8 and EAn 13 Data Fields    The required field length for EAN 8 Barcodes is seven characters and the  required field length for EAn 13 Barcodes is 12 characters  If the data field is  too long or too short  an err
209. round for characters with  descenders in dynamic alphanumeric printing   Not required for static alphanumeric printing  The  reverse field length is adjusted for characters  with descenders automatically in static  alphanumeric data   E Elongated Character Enter E  If this option is selected  the X3 and X4  Elongated option  Selects double Parameters must be set to 0   Printing height and single width  character output              158       Alphanumeric String Creation Commands  Create     Table 9  Static Dynamic Alphanumeric Creation Command                Field Function Option Modifier Selections  Cn  CPl and   Optional parameter for Enter C followed by one of the values below   Type Style selecting Characters Per 10  12  13  15  and 17 CPI   Selection Inch and OCR A and 10A for 10 CPI and OCR A type style  OCR B type styles  10B for 10 CPI and OCR B type style  If this optional parameter is not used  then the X3  and X4 parameters must be set to 0   AFn L  Optional field that Enter AF in the command string followed by a  Dynamic identifies location and the   value that identifies the dynamic string   data to be length of a dynamic L   number of characters in the dynamic  entered in alphanumeric string  If this   alphanumeric string  Valid range is 1   280  The  the option is enabled do not length of the dynamic string must be less than or  EXECUTE enter static text datain the   equal to the value signified by the L parameter   Form Mode  optional field following the  X4 p
210. rt code n   n Stop code DC4   hex  14 Start code n   n Stop code 14   dec  20 Start code n   n Stop code 20   Example    10 REM code 2 5 industrial barcode  20 LPRINT CHR  27    211     30 LPRINT CHR  26    B3 111  CHR  25       26   40 LPRINT CHR  20    27     50 LPRINT CHR  27     210        123   CHR  20         Code 2 5 Interleaved                Code 2 5 Interleaved  Syntax  Figures  n  Start Code Stop Code  ASCII    o    to    g    Hei or    e Beat or H  hex  30 to 39 3A or 3C 3B or 3D  dec  48 to 57 58 or 60 59 or 61                      Data Structure    ASCII DC4 Start code n   n Stop code DC4  hex  14 Start code n   n Stop code 14  dec  20 Start code n   n Stop code 20  Example    10 REM code 2 5 interleaved barcode   20 LPRINT CHR  27    211      30 LPRINT CHR  26    C3 111  CHR  25    40 LPRINT CHR    20    123   CHR  20    50 LPRINT CHR  27    210      NOTE  Due to the    interleaved mechanism     data stream  n   n  should only  be transferred with an even number of digits e g   not 398 but 0398    If an odd number of digits are transferred the printer adds a leading  zero to the printed barcode     237    Chapter 11 Data Formats of Barcode Types                Code 11  Syntax  Figures Characters  n  Start Code Stop Code  ASCII    o    to    o    and     gt     Hor Kai  hex  30 to 39 and 2D 3A 3A  dec  48 to 57 and 45 58 58                      Data Structure  ASCII DC4 Start code n   n Stop code DC4    hex  14 Start code n   n Stop code 14  dec  20 Start code n
211. s   regardless of your printer   s special barcode and LCP  Large Character  Printing  implementation     NOTE  Be sure to observe the notes in this chapter regarding the special  barcode LCP Types implemented in your printer and which of the  sequences described are not available as a result     Selecting the Barcode Mode automatically selects the corresponding  character set     To print barcode or LCP characters  the following sets must be carried out in  most cases     e Activate barcode    e Activate barcode unsecured mode  see    Secured Unsecured Mode    on  page 228     e Transfer barcode and or LCP header  see    Barcode Header    on page 230  and    LCP Header    on page 263     e Calculate check number  barcode only  see    Check Number Calculation     on page 258     e Transfer barcode and or LCP data   see    Data Formats of Barcode  Types    on page 235 and    LCP Header    on page 263     e Deactivate barcode  if necessary   The following commands are used to print barcode and LCP characters     SUB Start Character Barcode header   DLE Start Character LCP header   EM Stop Character Barcode and LCP header   DC4 Barcode brackets  start and end characters for barcode data   Sl LCP brackets  start and end characters for LCP data    ESC P   ESC     Settings for Barcode and LCP    225    Chapter    226    11    Introduction    This may cause conflict with other emulations  since the above commands  may have different functions in these emulations  For example     SI 
212. s  set to the extreme top left dot in the current print line  This is considered  the starting point for horizontal and vertical positioning     e The cursor position is defined as the current print location     Paper Motion Commands       The printer will lose track of the Top of Form position and will start printing in  random locations if paper movement exceeds approximately 8 feet during a  print job without finding one of the following Paper Motion commands     Form Feed Next TOF   Reverse Form Feed Current TOF   Vertical Tab Next VFU Channel 2   VFU Command Next or Previous indicated VFU Channel    These Paper Motion commands perform three functions   1  The Home is moved to a defined  absolute position    2  The Cursor position is aligned to the Home    3  Any printable data being held in the buffer is printed     Upon entering the Barcode Block Character Mode  the cursor is aligned to the  Home position  A Carriage Return places the cursor at the left margin  a Line  Feed places the cursor at the left margin and also moves it down by one line  feed distance  Cursor position is not affected when the Carriage Return and   or Line Feed are used as control sequence terminators  However  the control  sequence may affect Cursor position  Use of the Line Feed switch on the   printer   s control panel will move the cursor forward 1 6 inch steps  in 6 LPI  or  in 1 8 inch steps  in 8 LPI  and will align the Home position to the Cursor     The Cursor also moves horizontally for
213. s described in Control  Sequences earlier in this manual and can be printed in two different densities     e Normal Density   M    Characters will print 60 DPI vertically x 72 DPI horizontally     Double Density   D    Characters will print 120 DPI vertically x 72 DPI horizontally     In either Normal or Double Density modes  a Carriage Return Line Feed acts  simply as a command terminator  Their usual functions will not be carried out     Block Character Sizes       Individual block characters can be printed in the following sizes     e Height   the height of each block character ranges from 0 24   15 inches  high     e Width   the width of each block character ranges from 0 20 to 12 5 inches  wide     Normal Density   M  Examples       AM2 2 lt CRLF gt  BLOCK CHARACTERS  lt CRLF gt  prints     BLOCK CHARACTERS    After data is printed and terminated with a  lt CRLF gt   the next current print  position is at the bottom right corner of the last character printed  The next  data to be printed resets the cursor position to the top right corner before  printing  This causes all the block characters to align along their tops     AM6 6  lt CRLF DEF 4M4 4  lt CRLF gt  GHIAM2 2  lt CRLF gt  JKL  lt CRLF gt  prints     DEF CHI    To align the baselines of these characters  the cursor position must be  manipulated vertically using the Relative Cursor Move   R  control sequence  defined earlier under Control Sequences     141    Chapter    142    7    Block Characters    AM6 6  lt CRL
214. s form length in lines measured in 12 dot rows and  LFORM8 sets from length in lines measured in 9 dot rows        Valid Ranges   1   5461 lines for 6 LPI  1 7281 lines for 8 LPI    Duplication Commands  Create     NOTE  Make sure to send the proper command for the LPI  If you send the  LFORMS command when the printer is set for 6 LPI  the results are    not desirable     Duplication Commands  Create        There are two commands that can be used to duplicate elements on a form   HDUP  Horizontal Duplication  and VDUP  Vertical Duplication   Each  specifies the number of times the element will be printed and the spacing  between each duplication  These commands function with any element on a    form except Overlay Data     Horizontal Duplication Command    This command allows you to duplicate specific elements horizontally on a  form  such as lines  logos  barcodes  etc  The basic command is        Table 12  Horizontal Duplication Command                   Field Function Option Modifier Selections  HDUP  Command Specifier Enter HDUP   dups  Specifies number of duplications  Enter the desired number of duplications   The valid range of values is 1 255  Make  sure there is enough room on the form for  the duplication s  to print   dist Specifies the distance from the Enter a column or dot distance or a  starting point of one element to the   combination of columns and dots   next duplication  This parameter Whether in columns or dots depends on  may specify columns or dots or a
215. s in POL  315  User defined Barcode Ratios in POL 315  New Barcode Fonts nb  315  ISET USET Commands In POL  316  POINT Parmeter In POL 317  20 CPI Support IN POL  318    SCALE Command Modifications In POL  318    Table of Contents    l    OMS   Code V    Graphics    Processing Language    This manual describes the features and uses of the Code V Graphics  Processing Language  Code V uses a Graphics Processing Language  GPL   that provides the user with total control over the printing and formatting of  graphics images  This GPL is compatible with QMS   Code V    versions 1 and  2 and includes the following features     Block characters  printed horizontally or vertically with height and width  ranging from 0 1 to 9 9 inches  In addition to normal black on white  printing  block characters can be printed in special half tone patterns or in  reverse image  white characters on a black background      Numerous barcodes  including Code 39 Interleaved 2 of 5  UPC  EAN   Code 128  and Codabar  All barcodes can be printed horizontally or  vertically with various height  width  and ratio dimentions  Barcodes may  also be printed with or without human readable characters in a wide  variety of fonts     Solid or dashed line drawings using various line thickness    Box drawing with user definable size and border thickness    Horizontal and vertical duplication of graphics images    User definable  memory resident forms  including optional font fields   Predefined AIAG and Primary Metals
216. s printed as barcoded data     Customer Order Number    The seventh field  up to 15 characters  is printed as human readable  characters   The eighth field  up to 15 characters  is printed as barcoded data     Heat Process Number    The ninth field  up to 12 characters  is printed as human readable characters   The tenth field  up to 12 characters  is printed as barcoded data     Actual Weight    The eleventh field  up to five characters  is printed as human readable  characters   The twelfth field  up to five characters  is printed as barcoded data     Theoretical Weight Length    The thirteenth field  up to five characters  is printed as human readable  characters   The fourteenth field  up to five characters  is printed as barcoded data     Number of Pieces    The fifteenth field  up to five characters  is printed as human readable  characters   The sixteenth field  up to five characters  is printed as barcoded data     Size  Physical Description     The seventeenth field  up to 15 characters  is one of the physical attributes  printed as human readable characters    The eighteenth field  up to 15 characters  is one of the physical attributes  printed as human readable characters    The ninteenth field  up to 15 characters  is one of the physical attributes  printed as human readable characters     Primary Metals Form    Special Data    The twentieth field  up to 14 characters  is printed as a single line of human   readable characters    The twenty first field  up to 14 c
217. s to Normal mode        Enter the Form Definition Sequence  Refer  to your Operator Application Manual for  information on composing the download  sequence        The following parameters are used informs where Dynamic Alphanumeric Data Fields and  Barcodes have been defined  You may enter as many of the following fields as were originally  defined on the form                Arn  Optional parameter that specifies Enter the Special Function Control  one of the previously defined Character followed by AF  then the  Dynamic Alphanumeric Data fields    assigned number of the desired  Alphanumeric Data Field  End the entry  with the parameter delimiter   The ASCII character string that will   Enter the data parameter delimiter  Hiext field  be printed in the specified location    followed by the alphanumeric string and  end the entry with the data parameter  delimiter   NOTE  The delimiter cannot be used in  the alphanumeric string    BFn  Optional parameter that specifies Enter the Special Function Control  one of the previously defined Character followed by BF  then by the  Dynamic Dynamic Barcode Data assigned number of the desired Barcode  fields  Data Field and end the entry with the  parameter delimiter   The barcode data that will be Enter the data parameter delimiter  idata fieldt printed in the specified location  followed by the barcode data string and          end the entry with the data parameter  delimiter        The following parameters are used in forms where increm
218. selections for both is  from 0 to 113  Both must be set to zero if the Elongated parameter is used or any CPI other  than the default is specified  These parameters have no effect on OCR and Compressed  characters  For selections  gt  2  a block character style will be used for alphanumeric characters   See NOTE below        X3  Specifies vertical Enter a value from 0 to 113  Zero  0  specifies  expansion of the printer the standard size   output    X4  Specifies horizontal Enter a value from 0 to 113  Zero  0  specifies  expansion of the printer the standard size   output        Static alphanumeric data This alphanumeric string must be set off by the  that will print at the Character String Delimiter       Any standard    E SE by X1 ASCII printable character may be used except for  an SE the Character String Delimiter character     specified a dynamic To ch this stri t redefine th  GE o change this string  you must redefine the          ER  not use this parameter    STOP Optional parameter that Enter STOP  If you do not enter STOP  the printer  indicates the end of the will wait for another set of Alphanumeric  Alphanumeric command command parameters   and leaving the Create  mode                    NOTE  See Appendix B  page 269  for the approximate size of available  expansion factor for block characters  both horizontal and vertical  print orientation      160    Incremented Static  Fixed  Alphanumeric Strings    Incremented Static  Fixed  Alphanumeric Strings       To cr
219. specify columns or dots or a the SCALE Command  You may also use  combination of columns and dot the XX YY format for plotting duplication  positions  print locations explained earlier in the  Standards Section   element Defines the element that will be Enter print information in proper format   duplicated   You may define a line  call a logo or  a barcode  etc   VDUP OFF Termines Vertical duplication Enter VDUP OFF       mode           168    NOTE  You may embed Horizontal Duplication commands within Vertical  Duplication commands  but you cannot embed Vertical Duplication  commands within Vertical Duplication commands           Using Duplication Commands    Using Duplication Commands       Both the duplication commands use the same basic format  For these  examples we will use the HDUP and VDUP commands to duplicate the  BOMB Logo  which we create in a later section  on a form  The following  program would print the bomb logo four times horizontally on a form     Example 1  Horizontal Duplication     CREATE   BOMB  HDUP 4 10  LOGO  10 10 BOMB  STOP  HDUP   OFF   END   EXECUTE   BOMB   NORMAL    Printer Output     6 6 6 6    Example 2  Vertical Duplication    The following program would print the bomb logo four times vertically    CREATE   BOMB     EXECUTE   BOMB   NORMAL    Printer Output        169       Chapter 9 PGL Commands    Page Number Command  Create        This command allows you to place an automatically incremented page  number on each page in a specific location
220. specifying an ASCII value from 0 to 3  the barcode width can be defined   This allows adaption to the scanner specifications  particularly for long range  scanners                    Table 1 Normal Compressed      Header  Para  older printer older printer  meter O Em types O  24  types   e g MT230   e g MT230   S x 0   0 53mm   0 54mm   0 48mm   0 32 mm   0 33 mm  0 27 mm    Width of   y  4   0 74mm   0 67mm   0 69mm   0 53 mm   0 43 mm  0 37 mm 2   the x 2   1 16mm   1 09mm   1 16 mm   0 74mm   0 65 mm  0 59 mm 3   narrow bar  x     3   1 38mm   1 30mm   1 33mm   0 95 mm   0 88 mm 0 90 mm    Width of   y 0   0 53 mm   0 54 mm   0 48 mm   0 32 mm   0 33 mm  0 27 mm 3   the y 1   0 74mm   0 67 mm   0 69mm   0 53 mm   0 43 mm  0 37 mm 3   narrow   y 2   1 16mm   1 09mm   1 16mm   0 74mm   0 65 mm  0 59 mm 3   space y 3 1 38mm   1 30mm   1 33mm   0 95 mm   0 88 mm  0 90 mm 3   z 0 2051 2 0 12   Enlarge    7   4 25 1 25 12   ment   7 2 3 0 1 3 0 12   factor  723 3 5 1 3 5 12                                   233    Chapter    234    11 Barcode Printing    EAN UPC Barcode   X  Y   unregarded               Table 2 Header Parameter Normal Compressed 1   Enlargement z 0 1 95 1 1 30  1  factor z 1 1 60  1 0 95  1                   1  These values are true  if    Compressed Print    is selected in the menu  see  print feature  F       2  It is recommended to set the bar width equal to the space width  x y      3  Printer dependent reference value     All values are only valid when a ne
221. ss  command description  This field may be omitted  entirely if the justification value is zero      lt data gt  The characters to be printed   Example  The Graphics pass    M000100012 CPI CHARACTERS      prints     12 CPI CHARACTERS    15 CPI    The 15 CPI character set is 0 1 inches high and is selected using the following  command     Command     M U V E 0100jjD lt data gt     Arguments           M U V E  One of four Graphics Pass orientations   M for  horizontal     V for clockwise rotation     E for  counterclockwise rotation  or  U for upside down  and reverse order of characters      0100 A height width value of 0100 specifies 15 cpi  characters   jjd Justification values in increments of 0 1 inches     0 25 cm  and dot rows  as in the Graphics Pass  command description  This field may be omitted  entirely if the justification value is zero      lt data gt  The characters to be printed   Example  The Graphics Pass    M010000015 CPI CHARACTERS      prints     15 CPI CHARACTERS    39    Chapter    2    Code V Font Selection    Code V Font Selection       Since Code V runs on top of another emulation  the Code V Language has  the ability to print either emulation fonts or Code V fonts  When Code V is  turned on via the  PY   command  it sets the out of pass font to the 10 CPI  Draft emulation font using the character set selected on the Control Panel   Code V has the ability to select different kinds of fonts via Code V font  commands  These font commands and their effect
222. ssumed     e The control panel displays ONLINE GRAPHICS   e Graphics Mode is ON   PY      e The printer is in Free Format mode   F        Multiple Passes       A Graphics Pass may contain other GPL commands  including other  M   U   AV  and    E commands  The printer does not begin printing a Graphics pass  until the Pass is terminated  After a pass is printed  the next pass begins at  the bottom of the printed Pass     For example  the sequence of GPL commands  AM0101000A M0101000B   M0101000C     produces the same printed result  as    M0101000ABC     which prints    ABEL    whereas the three graphics Passes    M0101000A    4M0101000B    AM0101000C   print     Di    25    Chapter 1 GPL Commands    26    2 Character Printing    Control Panel Option       A new option has been added to the control panel under the Graphics  category  The new option  Vscale  determines whether or not vertical block  characters will be scaled to match the difference between the horizontal and  vertical print densities  The option is necessary to be fully compatible with old  QMS Code V version 1 boards that are still in the field     Block characters are build to be printed horizontally at 60 x 72  When the  characters are rotated and printed vertically  it is necessary to scale the  characters to maintain the cell size of the character  Some QMS Code V  version 1 boards do not handle this scaling  so that when a 5 x 7 block  character is rotated and printed vertically  it will actually be 4 x 8
223. syntax     Command  lt Begin Repeat Command gt    Yx   z4G lt End Repeat Command gt     Arguments  AY            AG    Turns ON the Automatic Increment Decrement  Mode     The operand  the value you start with in any  arithmetic operation   This value can be up to  twelve characters long  Valid characters are 0 to 9   the capital letters A to Z  and spaces     Select either the   or the   sign to determine  whether the operand will be incremented or  decremented  respectively     The operator  the amount that is incremented or  decremented at each step   This must be a numeric  value up to 12 digits long  If the operator exceeds  12 digits or if it contains non numeric characters   other than spaces   the operand remains  unchanged     Increment Decrement Terminator    Multiple Repeat Commands    Incrementing or decrementing numbers and characters is similar to adding or  subtracting numbers  Align the numers and or letters vertically in columns and  add or subtract each column  For example  K   1 means to advance 1  character position from K to the next letter  i e   K 1   L and K 1   J      The following examples show how automatic increments  addition  and  decrements  subtraction  apply to numeric and character fields     OA 0 A9 OA  Operand    1  1  1  11  Operator   0B 9 BO 1B  Answer     In automatic incrementing and decrementing  the alphabet wraps around  itself  meaning that A is one character position beyond Z  The normal  arithmetic rules of carrying or subtractin
224. t the size at which Block Character Smoothing  begins     NOTE  Smoothing slows down the Code V processing  The default is size 3     ISO Character Sets       46    Several international standard character sets may be selected with this  command  When issued inside a pass  this command selects the ISO  language for the duration of that pass only  When issued outside a pass  it  selects the language used in all non pass printing     There are 12 character positions which differ depending on the ISO language  selected  See below     NOTE  The ISO characters can only be used inside of a Graphics Pass when  using the Twinax or Coax interface     Command  ISO n G    Arguments  NISO  Command Identifier  selects an ISO character set   n  The number of the desired character set    G Command Terminator    Block Character    ISO Character Set Table       Inside Graphics Pass    Language  N ISO Hex 23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E  o USA S SG e IA lr       t      1 UK S    11   041     2 SwefFin   X EA Oo AO    a o 4 Ga  3 Nor Dan     ee oA rr we ow       4 Japan     0  Y     4 1 3  gt    5 Germany        A OU   46a 8B  6 France    Bar ep rn   p   6  7 Haly e   s oc    t aso   8 Spain E SS i N             E    Outside Graphics Pass   Language   iSO Hex 23 24 40 5B 5C 5D 5E 60 7B 7C 7D 7E  O USA SS  ff      4 1      1 UK oe ee eee ee  2 Sweffin  X       O D   e ao ap  3 NorDan     ee ox           4 Japan    erpe           t     5 Germany       AOU     ao    8  6 France     a   q 8    
225. tal Tab    83  Vertical Justification       oooonnonnninccicnnnnnnnccnncnncnroncccnnnnncnnnnnnnnrrrnn cnn 84  Pass Heladas 85  Pass Oe e EE 86  Pass Density ccoo ir a a A l   86  DoS Wicca iris iia 87  Forme  condal 87  Interrupt FUNCTION    ccc cit it ee da ia 88   Repeating Data  89   Repeating Data  Version 3    89  Horizontal Repeat  Version 3    89  Vertical Repeat  Version 2    91  Multiple Repeat Commande  92   Automatic Increment Decrement cooccccnnccccnocccnononcnonananononcnana no ninnccnnnnos 94   Repeating Data  Version      98  Horizontal Repeat A 98    Vertical Repeat kk 98    Table of Contents    6 Buffered Defined FOrmS         nn0000aennnnnnnneoooneeeeen 99  Buffered Forms EE 99  IRC 99  Buffered Form Create cococccococinoccccnonccnonncononccananono nono na nananccannccnnnes 100  Buffered Form Execute A 100  Control Code Command Changes   oococccncccconcccnnaccnnancnnanananananinns 101  Buffered Form Deleie uk  104  Buffered Form Heset  kk REENEN  104  Buffered Form Liest  105  Buffered Form Repeat AA 106  Buffered Form COPY cocoooccccnocccononcnnonncnnnnncnnanoncnan cnn nano nn rana nanannccnanes 106  A a nds 108  Predefined FOM Siipi aaa a aiaei taa airida 109  AAG elt EE 109  Primary Metals FOM coronan cnn nn nnnnncanannns 111  Version 1 Buffered Formatpnmg  AA 116  Buffered Form Create cocococccccinoccccoocccnonncononccnnannnn conan n rana nc nanncnnn nes 116  Control Code Command Changes   oococccnccccnoccconacccnonannnanncananacinno 116   7 Industrial G
226. te printing of a form you must first  enter EXECUTE Mode  To assist in composing the various parameters that  can be used with the EXECUTE Form Command  the basic command is  provided again     The basic command to enter EXECUTE Mode is        EXECUTE    Name       AFx   text fields        BFn      data field        pe                     STARTDATA    STARTDATA          gl NORMAL      First send the EXECUTE Command    EXECUTE Mode  Normal     Table 16  EXECUTE Form Command                            Field Function Option Modifier Selections     EXECUTE    Command Specifier  Instructs Enter the current Special Function Control  pritner to enter EXECUTE Mode  Character followed by EXECUTE    Name  Specifies Form to print  Enter form name exactly as assigned   when it was created    PAGEn  Optional parameter that sets the Enter PAGE followed by a decimal number  beginning page number for an ranging from 0   99999999  then the  incremental page number  Ifa page   parameter delimiter  Upon reaching the  number location has not been 99999999th page  the page number resets  specified in the CREATE Form to 0  If no page number is specified no  Mode  the page number will printin   page number will print  even if a space was  the upper left corner of the form  designated in the Form Definition    FC Optional parameter that specifies Enter the desired number of forms  You  the number of forms to print  This can print a total of 4 294 967 296 forms   parameter cannot be used if  dynamic 
227. ted    as human readable characters     AG Command Terminator    Example 3     Example 4     Barcode Version 2    Example 2 may be printed with the human readable characters  embedded in the barcode by replacing B with an E as shown  below     M0505000   IBARC C39 E 12345   G   prints     O    AMO505000 Sets up horizontal orientation and sets the barcode  height to 0 5 inches     AIBARC  Turns ON the Barcode Mode     C39  Selects the first barcode style in Table 3  page 65    Code 39     E  Embeds human readable characters at the bottom  of the barcode    12345 The data to be encoded as a barcode and printed  as human readable characters    AG Command Terminator   The human readable character translation printed below or    embedded in a barcode may be printed in any of the fonts  available with the IFONT command  The command sequence  AMO5050004IFONT S 14G4IBARC C128 B Rusty Old Car G    prints     Rusty Old Car    AMO505000 Sets up horizontal orientation and sets the barcode  height to 0 5 inches     AIFONT S 14GSets font to be Draft at 10 CPI   AIBARC Turns ON the Barcode Mode     C128 Selects Code 128  see Table 3  page 65    B Print human readable characters below the  barcode     Rusty Old Car  The data to be encoded as a barcode with human   readable characters     AG Command Terminator    67    Chapter 4    Example 5  The Graphics Pass      U0505 BARC EAN8 E 12345671G     prints   Pret    IL    4U0505 Causes the barcode to be upside down with a  height of 0 5 inches  
228. ted of any  crime s  involving explosives     litions can be YOU TOD        Figure 9  Sample Form Printout    203    Chapter 9 Practice    204    1 O PGL Barcodes    PGL Barcodes  Used in CREATE Mode Only     PGL incorporates several barcode styles in its command set  Most barcodes  use the same basic set of parameters  Barcode commands follow the same  requirements as other PGL commands as far as how they are entered  ability  to change orientation of printer output  adjust darkness of output  etc  They  can also be printed in incremented format        For this section of the manual we first explain all of the barcode parameters   followed by a table showing which parameters each barcode uses  After the  table we present the exceptions for each barcode and how to increment  barcodes     NOTE     Alphanumeric text string delimiter        Parameter delimiter     Barcode Command Parameters       BARCODE    This is the Barcode Command  It notifies the printer that the data stream that  follows is to be used to format and define a specific barcode type     Enter  BARCODE    Name CD    This parameter specifies the type of barcode that will be printed  Table 38 on  page 206 lists barcodes that PGL can print and how they should be entered     205    Chapter 10    206    PGL Barcodes  Used in CREATE Mode Only     Table 38  PGL Barcodes                               Enter Function   C3 9CD Specifies a Code 39 type bacode  CD is an optional parameter that  instructs the printer to calc
229. the printer emulates     Version Selections  Menu Level 3   2  Version 2   Default selection   1  Version 1     Descender  Descndr  Parameter  Menu Level 2     Descender  Descndr  Parameter  Menu Level 2        This parameter controls insertion of the character descender gap between  print lines     Descndr Selections  Menu Level 2     Fixed  The descender gap is always inserted after the line regardless  of the setting of Descender Mode  Default selection      Auto  The descender gap is only inserted after lines containing  characters with descenders     Zero Parameter  Menu Level 2        As an aid in distinguishing zeros from the upper case letter O you can choose  to have your zeros slashed         Zero Selections  Menu Level 3   Open  O   Slashed      Default selection     Vscale Parameter  Menu Level 2        This parameter determines whether vertical block characters will be scaled to  the same dimensions as horizontal block characters     Vscale Selections  Menu Level 3   OFF  ON  Default selection     PGL Special Function Command Character  SFCC   Parmeter  Menu Level 2        This parameter allows you to change the SFCC  The default for this  parameter is the ASCII tilde     Decimal 126  HEX 7E  character  This  parameter is only applicable to the PGL Graphics option   See    Change  SFCC Command  Normal and Execute     on page 182    SFCC Selections  Menu Level 3     1 255  Decimal designators for ASCII characters      295    Appendix H Graphic Category  Menu Level
230. the same pass  Tab and justify commands can be  used to position plot images anywhere in a pass     57    Chapter    Logos    Logos    The X is drawn dot by dot as illustrated in Figure 2     Hex Value  41 22 14 08       7  6  5  4  3  2  1  0    Figure 2  Plot Mode Example       58    A set of predefined logos come with Code V  See Appendix C     Logos    on  page 271 for a table of logos  The first twelve are available in all four  orientations  the last two only work in horizontal and upside down orientations   There are two commands for printing logos  Version 1 Command and Version  2 Command  The Version 1 Command can only print the copyright and  registered trademark logos  the Version 2 Command prints all the logos     Version 1 Logos       The Version 1 logo command can only print the horizontal registered  trademark and copyright logos  The logo command must be within a Graphics  Pass     Command    Zn  Arguments  AZ Version 1 logo command    n Either 1 or 2  A value of 1 prints    and a value of 2  prints        Example  The command sequence    M0404REGISTER   Z1   prints     REGISTER       Version 2 logos    Version 2 logos       The Version 2 logo command prints all logos  The logo command must occur  within a Graphics Pass     Command    ILOGO d nn4G    Arguments  AILOGO Version 2 logo command  d Density  H high  L low  nn A hex number indicating the logo to be used   See Appendix C     Logos    on page 271 for a listing  of logo numbers   AG Command Terminator  
231. ts  when issued inside a pass  select the font used for the  duration of that pass only  When used outside a pass  they select the font  used in all non graphics printing     Command     Cnn    Arguments   A C Draft Font Command    nn One of the draft font numbers listed below   05   double high  0 2 inch   7 5 CPI   10   10 CPI  12   12 CPI  13   13 3 CPI  15 15 CPI  17   17 1 CPI    Font Quality Speed       44    Code V is capable of printing most of the Code V fonts at three different  speeds and qualities  The slowest print speed produces the highest quality  fonts  while the fastest print speed produces the lowest quality fonts  A Font  Quality Speed Command may be sent either inside or outside of a pass and  remains in effect until another Font Quality Speed Command is issued or  Graphics Mode is exited     These commands only affect the Code V Draft Font at 12  13 3  15  and 17 1  CPI and the Code V NLQ Font at 10  12  13 3  and 17 1 CPI     The three Code V Font Quality Speed commands are  High Quality Font  Full   Space Font  and Half Space Font     High Quality Font Mode    Selects slow speed  high quality fonts  The DPI of the font selected by a Code  V Font Command depends upon the selected font and may cause the paper  to back up and the shuttle to change speed  Fonts printed in this mode are  positioned on character cell boundaries     Command 4 FQ       Full Space Font Mode       Selects 120 DPI  medium speed  medium quality fonts  The paper will not  back up t
232. tter Length  vicio tits 22  Passo Matan 23  GPL COMMANA EE 25  Multiple Passes A 25   2 Character PRIATING  ras 27  Control Panel OPIO pronta lor ii ore 27  Block Characters nein aerei iaieiiea ac Fa 27  Descender Mode drana a an Ana NaS SEa A ALA AITAN A AEEA TARN 32  Nun Le ET 33  Revese Image Descender Mode    33  Hal TONG EE 34  Half Tone Toggle AER 35  Half Tone Reverse IMage     cccconocccccccoccccccconannnononanencnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrs 35  Half Dot Mode  Double Densttv  AAA 36    Half Dot Mode And Half Tones       occcoonccccncccccnncncnnnacanonancnnnnancnnnan 36    Table of Contents    Block Character FOnt            c  ccccccsessceeeeseneeeeseseeeeeessneeeeesseseeesessaes 37  TS CR A eee See A ee a a a a 37  O ee ee Lean EE geen deeg 38  V2 OPI WEE 39  OS GPU EE 39   Code V Font Selection             ccccccccsssscecceesenneeeeeessneeeeeesseeeeessesueeeeessaes 40   Code V Character Set Gelecton  eer rerreerrrerereere 40   Compressed FO ject opel 41   NO FONS vision vateadaca a A aida eds 42   Default Font Selection        coonoocccnonncooccncconononnnnonononnncconann non cono ncnncnann noo 43   Draft  Gel 44   Font Quality Speedie aseinani an a rann iaiia karas 44  High Quality Font Mode   oooooccciccccccnccccononcnonnnccnanc canoa co nano ca nancnnnnns 44  Full Space Font Mode cccoooccccnccccconccoconccononcccnonnna nano cn nann cc nana ca nanncnos 44  Half Space Font Mode cococccccccioniciconocccononcconnncnonnncnono nc cano nc nnnnncnnnnrs 45   EINES  Per ne EE 45  
233. two types of  representation     e if the parameter is in pointed parentheses  the decimal value must be  transmitted    e if the parameter is not in pointed parentheses  the ASCII value must be  transmitted    Example    Parameter representation   lt n gt   with n 0   to be transmitted  dec 0  hex 00    Parameter representation  n  with n 0   to be transmitted  ASCII  0   hex 30  dec 48     Character explanation and symbol descriptions       Information important notes      Optional  must be not necessarily be transmitted  E  9 needle printer   24 24 needle printer    Special Features       If you did not receive the required Barcode control codes from the ASCII code  table columns O and 1 from your computer  use a set of MTPL sequences to  generate these control codes by printable ASCII characters  The Barcode  programs will remain fully compatible in spite of the additional MTPL  sequences     The following control codes in Barcode strings can be substituted by the  appropriate ANSI sequences     Table 43  Barcode Strings Control Codes                      ANSI Sequence  Control Code  CSI   Hex 9B or Example  Hex   Hex 1B 5B or ESC    SUB CSI 26 Space s 1B 5B 32 36 20 73  EM CSI 25 Space s 1B 5B 32 35 20 73  DC4 CSI 20 Space s 1B 5B 32 30 20 73  DLE CSI 16 Space s 1B 5B 31 36 20 73  Sl CSI 15 Space s 1B 5B 31 35 20 73          ANSI sequences without matching parameters will be ignored           227    Chapter 11  Secured Unsecured Mode    NOTE  These features are not avail
234. ulate and plot the optional Modulo 43 check  digit    C128B Specifies a Code 128B Barcode    C128C Specifies a Code 128C Barcode    EAN8 Specifies an EAN 8 Barcode    EAN13 Specifies an EAN 13 Barcode    1 2 5CD Specifies an Interleaved 2 5 Barcode  CD is an optional parameter that  instructs the printer to calculate and plot the optional Modulo 10 check  digit    MSIn Specifies an MSI Barcode  The n value specifies the type of check digit  combinations   lfn    A   Single Digit modulo 10 followed by a second modulo 10 digit   B   Single Digit modulo 11 followed by a second modulo 11 digit   C   Single Digit modulo 10  D   Single Digit modulo 11   POSTNET Specifies a POSTNET Barcode    UPC A Specifies a UPC A Barcode    UPC E Specifies a UPC E Barcode        VSCAN  Vertical Scan     Optional parameter that changes barcode print orientation  When included in    the command structure it causes the printer to print the barcode in vertical  orientation  90 degrees counterclockwise rotation      Enter  VSCAN       Barcode Command Parameters    Magnification Value  X Factor     Optional parameter that specifies a horizontal expansion amount  X Factor   for the barcode output  When used this value causes an increase in the  physical size of the barcode  Table 39 lists the expandable barcodes and  allowable expansion factors     Table 39  X Factor VS Barcode Style                                                 ENTER Barcode Style  X Factor C3 9 C128B C128C 12 5 ee   X1 Y Y Y Y Y  X1
235. ut HRI  Syntax  Figures  n  Dieter Start Code SH Stop Code  ASCII  0  to  9  Calculation d ue Vi  see    Check  hex  30 to 39 Number 3A 3A 3A  dec  48 to 57 Calculation    58 58 58  on page 258                          Data Structure   ASCII DC4 Start code nnnn Separation code nnnc Stop code DC4  hex  14 Start code nnnn Separation code nnnc Stop code 14   dec  20 Start code nnnn Separation code nnnc Stop code 20    Example   10 REM code EAN 8 without HRI   20 LPRINT CHR  27    211      30 LPRINT CHR  26    13 111  CHR  25     40 LPRINT CHR  20    0123 4567   CHR  20    50 LPRINT CHR  27     10      IM    243    Chapter    11 Data Formats of Barcode Types                Code EAN 13 With HRI  Syntax  Figures  n  smear Start Code oa Stop Code  ASCII  0  to  9  Calculation P ae Zb  see    Check  hex  30 to 39 Number 3A 3A 3A  dec  48 to 57 Calculation    58 58 58  on page 258                          244    Data Structure  ASCII DC4 Start code nnnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code DC4    hex  14 Start code nnnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 14    dec  20 Start code nnnnnnn Separation code nnnnnc Stop code 20    Example    10 REM code EAN 13 with HRI    20 LPRINT CHR  27    211     30 LPRINT CHR  26    K3 111   CHR  25    40 LPRINT CHR  20    50 LPRINT CHR  27     210      al 123456   789012         0123456 789012    CHR  20         Code EAN 13 Without HRI                   Code EAN 13 Without HRI  Syntax  Figures  n  Dieter Start Code SH Stop Code  ASCII  0  to  9  Calcu
236. value of 5E     Changing The CVCC       There are two ways to change the CVCC     Using ESC Sequences  Using the  N Command Change Sequence    This method can only be done in Graphics Mode  Send the  N followed by the  new CVCC  hex  OOto hex  FF   then terminate the    N sequence with the  New CVCC     Example     AN   would change to CVCC to the ASCII dollar sign character     hex  24  Dec 36      When you leave Graphics Mode and return to Character Mode or when the  pritner is reset  the Command Character defaults to the ASCII caret character    Wl  Through The Control Panel    This method can be used either in Graphics Mode or in Character Mode  To  use this method take the printer offline and access the Configuration Menu   After accessing the Configuration Menu proceed through the menu levels until  you access the decimal selections under the CVCC Parameter in the  Graphics Category  Scroll until the desired decimal value is reached  then  depress the ENTER key  This Command Character will remain valid until you  exit Graphics Mode  this resets it to the default value   the printer is reset  or  you change it with a  N command or through the control panel     NOTE  If the Command Character is set through the Control Panel outside of  Graphics Mode  that character stays in effect unless changed by the  AN command  If a config  report is printed while in Graphics Mode  it  will show the character chosen with the  N command instead of the  character selected through the co
237. w color ribbon is used  The values change  depending on the degree of wear     e narrow bar  approx   0 05 mm  e narrow space  approx   0 05 mm     Code EAN 128 and EAN UPC are based on module widths  Only the X  parameter is valid for this type  This parameter is used for the Y parameter   narrow bar width   The Z parameter has no meaning  In combination with the  normal condensed feature  8 widths result  see Table 1 on page 233      Error Code    Wrong characters in a control code or in a barcode test  e g  an undefined  character in a certain barcode type  cause the barcode error sign to print     Data Formats of Barcode Types    Code 2 5 Matrix                                           Code 2 5 Matrix  Syntax  Figures  n  Start Code Stop Code  ASCII    o    to    g    Ge Sol  hex  30 to 39 3A 3A  dec  48 to 57 58 58  Data Structure  ASCII DC4 Start code n   n Stop code DC4  hex  14 Start code n   n Stop code 14  dec  20 Start code n   n Stop code 20  Example    10 REM code 2 5 matrix barcode    20 LPRINT CHR  27    211       A3 111  CHR  25      30 LPRINT CHR      26    40 LPRINT CHR  20    123   CHR  20     27      50 LPRINT CHR      121 Q      235    Chapter    236    11 Data Formats of Barcode Types    Code 2 5 Industrial                               Syntax  Figures  n  Start Code Stop Code   ASCII    o    to    g    S i or  gt     oa Ee or ep     hex  30 to 39 3A  3C  or 3E   3B  3D  or 3F  dec  48 to 57 58  60  or 62   59  61  or 63   Data Structure   ASCII DC4 Sta
238. wed by the data to encode  and the printer will do the  rest  The Barcode styles included in the CVCC are     e Code 39   e Code 128   e   Interleaved 2 of 5  e UPCA   e UPCE   e EAN   e Codabar   e  Identicon 2 of 5   e MSI   e Postnet    Barcodes may be printed in all of the four standard orientations  in Version 2  only   with or without human readable character translation in any of the  available fonts  and at any height ranging from 0 3 to 9 9 inches  In addition   many of the above styles are available with or without check digits and all  allow adjustment of bar space ratios     To print a barcode  the Barcode Command followed by the data to be  encoded must be sent to the printer as part of a Graphics Pass  When the  printer receives the Barcode Command  it first verifies that the data sent  adheres to the established specifications for that barcode  If the data does not  meet the specifications  the printer will print out the Barcode Command and  data as an error message     Some barcodes have a fixed number of digits  UPC and EAN  for instance  If  less than the fixed number of digits is specified  the printer pads to the fixed  number of digits with zeros on the left of the data  If more than the fixed  number of digits is specified  the number is truncated and the remaining digits  on the right are ignored     61    Chapter    62    4    Selecting Barcodes       Code V supports Version 1 and Version 2 Barcode commands  Version 1  commands allow more flexibility i
239. wide gap  respectively  For example  the first  two numbers  1 2  in the INT2 5A barcode style indicates 1 unit for the narrow  bar width and 2 units for the narrow gap  These units are measured in dot   columns for horizontal barcodes and dot rows for vertical barcodes     65       Chapter    66    4    NOTE  We    cannot guarantee tha barcode data with unique ratios other than    those listed above will result in readable printer output  When using  unique ratios  make sure that the wide and narrow bar ratios conform  to requirements for readability     Example 1     Example 2     The following command is the Version 2 equivalent of Example 1  in the Version 1 barcode section   AM0515000 IBARC C39 N 123451G   prints       ch  MAN    AMO0O515000 Specifies that the barcode is horizontal with a  height of 0 5 inches     AIBARC Turns ON the Barcode mode              C39 Selects barcode style Code 29 from Table 3   page 65    N Turns OFF human readable character printing    12345 The data to be encoded into a barcode    AG Command Terminator   As an example of a Version 2 barcode with human readable    character translation   M05050004IBARC C39 B  123454G      prints   12345    AMO505000 Sets up horizontal orientation and sets the barcode  height to 0 5 inches     AIBARC  Turns ON the Barcode Mode     C39  Selects the first barcode style in Table 3  page 65    Code 39     B  Places human readable characters below the  barcode    12345 The data to be encoded as a barcode and prin
240. width  Character Width Multiplier in even numbers in the    range 2 124  default   2      NOTE  Odd numbers can be selected  but they will default to the next lower  even number  5  gt 4  7  gt 6  etc       AN   Select New Introducer  Selects a new character as the control sequence introducer where   Command 4N   NL  Argument      Any single graphic character  such as          etc   The default character is      caret   To avoid potential  problems  the new introducer should not be an    alpha numeric character  not the letters A Z or the  numbers 0 9      To print the Introducer character as data  send it twice     For example     prints        AR   Relative Cursor Move    Moves the cursor relative to its current position in increments equal to the  current block character height or width     Command 4R xrel   yrel NL  Argument     xrel x W  The distance to move horizontally in increments of  0 01 inches  where W is the current width value   Positive values move the cursor right  and negative  values move it left  Total distance must be in the  range 0 1320  default   0       yrel x H  The distance to move vertically in increments of  0 01 inches  where H is the current height value   Positive values move the cursor down  and  negative values move it up  Total distance must be  in the range 0 9999  default   0      Valid Control Sequences    AS   Signed Cursor Move   Moves the cursor relative to its current position in increments of fixed value   Command    X xsign   ysign N
241. y  PY    Auto          If error correction level 9  auto  is selected  the error level will be selected as  follows                    Number of Data   Error Correction  Codewords Level  1 40 2  40 160 3  161 320 4  321 863 5                NOTE  This table corresponds to the recommended error correction levels     The height and width of the bars correspond to the magnification of the  current pass     312    PDF417 in PGL    Example   AM11030004T00104IBARC PDF417 2 3 This is an example G    Produces a barcode with bars 11 dots high and 3 dots wide  containing 2 data  columns and 16 error correction codewords  error correction level 3   The  encoded data is    This is an example        PDF417 in PGL    BARCODE    PDF417  lt X lt D gt n  gt  lt Y lt D gt n  gt  lt  Hn I Wn   gt  lt ASPECT h w  gt  lt  Rn     Cn   gt  lt Sn  gt      lt BFn L  gt  lt DARK  gt SR SC T        STOP T    X lt  D  gt n Specifies the horizontal size of the narrow bar in 1 60ths of an  inch  if D is present  If D is not present the size is specified in  dots    Y lt D gt n Specifies the vertical size of the narrow bar in 1 60ths of an  inch  if D is present  If D is not present the size is specified in  dots    Hn Specifies the overall height of the barcode in 1 10ths of an inch   The valid range for n is 4 99    Wn Specifies the overall width of the barcode in 1 10ths of an inch     The valid range for n is 4 99     ASPECT h w Specifies the overall height to width aspect ratio of the barcode   The de
242. yphen  13  14  period   period  14  15     15  16 0 0 16  17 1 1 17  18 2 2 18  19 3 3 19  20 4 4 20  21 5 5 21  22 6 6 22          75    Chapter    76    4    Table 5  Code 128 Translation Table                                                          eas Code A Code B Code C  23 7 7 23  24 8 8 24  25 9 9 25  26 26  27 a   27  28  lt   lt  28  29     29  30  gt   gt  30  31     31  32     32  33 A A 33  34 B B 34  35 C C 35  36 D D 36  37 E E 37  38 F F 38  39 G G 39  40 H H 40  41 l l 41  42 J J 42  43 K K 43  44 L L 44  45 M M 45  46 N N 46  47 O O 47  48 P P 48  49 Q Q 49  50 R R 50  51 S S 51                Code 128 Special Characters    Table 5  Code 128 Translation Table                                                          ER Code A Code B Code C  Value  52 T T 52  53 U U 53  54 V V 54  55 Ww Ww 55  56 X X 56  57 Y Y 57  58 Z Z 58  59     59  60     60  61     61  62 A A 62  63 63  64 NUL     64  65 SOH a 65  66 STX b 66  67 ETX c 67  68 EOT d 68  69 ENQ e 69  70 ACK f 70  71 BEL g 71  72 BS h 72  73 HT i 73  74 LF j 74  75 VT k 75  76 FF   76  77 CR m 77  78 SO n 78  79 Sl O 79  80 DLE p 80                77    Chapter    78    4    Table 5  Code 128 Translation Table                                              Segoe Code A Code B Code C   81 DC q 81   82 DC2 r 82   83 DC3 Ss 83   84 DC4 t 84   85 NAK u 85   86 SYN V 86   87 ETB W 87   88 CAN x 88   89 EM y 89   90 SUB Z 90   91 ESC   91   92 FS l 92   93 GS   93   94 RS   94   95 US DEL 95   96 FNC 3 FNC 3 96   
243. ze    Tables    Block Character Size Table       The following table lists the approximate physical size of expanded Block  Characters specified in the Alphanumerics String Creation Command     Table 47  Block Character Size                                                    Expansion Character Character Expansion Character Character  Factor Height Width Factor Height Width  0 0 0 17 1 75    1 67     1 0 12    0 08    18 1 75    1 83     2 0 23    0 17    19 1 87    1 92     3 0 35    0 33    20 1 98    2 00     4 0 35    0 42    21 2 10    2 08     5 0 47    0 50    22 2 22    2 13     6 0 58    0 58    23 2 33    2 33     7 0 70    0 67    24 2 45    2 42     8 0 82    0 83    25 2 45    2 50     9 0 93    0 92    26 2 57    2 58     10 1 05    1 00    27 2 68    2 67     11 1 05    1 08    28 2 80    2 83     12 1 17    1 17    29 2 92    2 92     13 1 28    1 33    30 3 03    3 00     14 1 40    1 42    31 315    3 08     15 1 52    1 50    32 3 15    3 17     16 1 63    1 58    33 3 27    3 33                         301       Appendix J    Block Character Size Table    Table 47  Block Character Size                                                                      Expansion Character Character Expansion Character Character  Factor Height Width Factor Height Width  34 3 38    3 42    62 6 18    6 17     35 3 50    3 50    63 6 30    6 33     36 3 62    3 58    64 6 42    6 42     37 3 73    3 67    65 6 53    6 50     38 3 85    3 92    66 6 65    6 58     39 3 97    
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
Samsung RT32 極簡雙門系列  Samsung CE1151T Uživatelská přiručka  CA Agile Vision - Guía del usuario  Manual del usuario  LM-8ST Owner`s Manual    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file